Marantz SR7009 User Manual To The 65e3eb68 56b0 4a88 Bc89 1229547d892b
65e3eb68-56b0-4a88-b.. 65e3eb68-56b0-4a88-bc89-1229547d892b
User Manual: Marantz SR7009 to the manual
Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 357 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]
- Accessories
- Features
- Part names and functions
- Connections
- Playback
- Basic operation
- Playing an iPod
- Playing a USB memory device
- Listening to music on a Bluetooth device
- Listening to an HD Radio™ stations
- Listening to an HD Radio broadcast
- Tuning in by entering the frequency (Direct Tune)
- Changing the tune mode (Tune Mode)
- Selecting an audio program
- Tuning in to stations and presetting them automatically (Auto Preset Memory)
- Presetting the current broadcast station (Preset Memory)
- Listening to preset stations
- Specify a name for the preset broadcast station (Preset Name)
- Skipping preset broadcast stations (Preset Skip)
- Cancelling Preset Skip
- Checking the HD Radio reception information
- Listening to Internet Radio
- Playing back files stored on a PC and NAS
- Viewing photographs on the Flickr site
- Listening to Pandora®
- Listening to SiriusXM Internet Radio
- AirPlay function
- Spotify Connect function
- Convenience functions
- Performing repeat playback
- Performing random playback
- Registering to Favorites
- Playing back content added to the “Save to Favorites”
- Deleting content added to favorites
- Searching content with keywords (Text Search)
- Playing back music and a favorite picture at the same time (Slideshow)
- Setting the Slideshow Interval
- Adjusting the audibility of dialog and vocals (Dialog Enhancer)
- Adjusting the volume of each channel to match the input source (Channel Level Adjust)
- Adjusting the tone (Tone)
- Displaying your desired video during audio playback (Video Select)
- Adjusting the picture quality for your viewing environment (Picture Mode)
- Playing the same music in all zones (All Zone Stereo)
- Selecting a sound mode
- HDMI control function
- Sleep timer function
- Smart select function
- Web control function
- Panel lock function
- Remote lock function
- Switches light illumination on/off
- Playback in ZONE2/ZONE3 (Separate room)
- Settings
- Tips
- Appendix
- About HDMI
- Video conversion function
- Playing back a USB memory devices
- Playing back a Bluetooth device
- Playing back a file saved on a PC or NAS
- Playing back Internet Radio
- Personal memory plus function
- Last function memory
- Sound modes and channel output
- Sound modes and surround parameters
- Types of input signals, and corresponding sound modes
- Explanation of terms
- Trademark information
- Specifications
- Index
- List of preset codes
- License

Accessories 8
Inserting the batteries 9
Operating range of the remote control unit 9
Features 10
High quality sound 10
High performance 11
Easy operation 14
Part names and functions 15
Front panel 15
Display 20
Rear panel 24
Remote control unit 27
Connections
Connecting speakers 32
Speaker installation 32
Speaker connection 39
Speaker configuration and “Amp Assign” settings 42
Connecting a TV 59
Connection 1 : TV equipped with an HDMI connector and
compatible with the ARC (Audio Return Channel) 60
Connection 2 : TV equipped with an HDMI connector and
incompatible with the ARC (Audio Return Channel) 61
Connection 3 : TV equipped without an HDMI connector 62
Connecting a playback device 63
Connecting a set-top box (Satellite tuner/cable TV) 64
Connecting a DVD player or Blu-ray Disc player 65
Connecting a video camcorder or game console 66
Connecting a turntable 67
Connecting a device with a multi-channel output connector 68
Connecting an iPod or USB memory device to the USB port 69
Connecting an HD radio receiver 71
Connecting to a home network (LAN) 73
Wired LAN 73
Wireless LAN 74
Connecting an external control device 75
REMOTE CONTROL jacks 75
DC OUT jacks 76
Connecting the power cord 77
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
Contents
2
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Playback
Basic operation 79
Turning the power on 79
Selecting the input source 79
Adjusting the volume 80
Turning off the sound temporarily (Muting) 80
Playback a DVD player/Blu-ray Disc player 80
Playing an iPod 81
Listening to music on an iPod 82
iPod Browse Mode settings 83
Performing repeat playback 85
Performing random playback 85
Playing a USB memory device 86
Playing files stored on USB memory devices 87
Listening to music on a Bluetooth device 89
Pairing with a Bluetooth device 90
Playing a Bluetooth device 91
Pairing with the Pairing Mode 93
Listening to an HD Radio™ stations 94
Listening to an HD Radio broadcast 96
Tuning in by entering the frequency (Direct Tune) 98
Changing the tune mode (Tune Mode) 98
Selecting an audio program 99
Tuning in to stations and presetting them automatically (Auto
Preset Memory) 99
Presetting the current broadcast station (Preset Memory) 100
Listening to preset stations 100
Specify a name for the preset broadcast station (Preset Name) 101
Skipping preset broadcast stations (Preset Skip) 102
Cancelling Preset Skip 103
Checking the HD Radio reception information 104
Listening to Internet Radio 105
Listening to Internet Radio 106
Playing the last played Internet Radio station 107
Using vTuner to add Internet Radio stations to favorites 108
Playing back files stored on a PC and NAS 109
Applying media sharing settings 110
Playing back files stored on a PC and NAS 111
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
3
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Viewing photographs on the Flickr site 113
Viewing photographs shared by particular users 114
Viewing all photographs on Flickr 116
Listening to Pandora®117
Listening to Pandora®118
Creating a new station 120
Listening to an existing station 121
Listening to created radio stations at random 121
Giving feedback and managing stations 122
Sign Out 123
Listening to SiriusXM Internet Radio 124
Listening to SiriusXM Internet Radio 125
Sign Out 126
AirPlay function 127
Playing songs from your iPhone, iPod touch or iPad 128
Playing iTunes music with this unit 128
Selecting multiple speakers (devices) 129
Perform iTunes playback operations with the remote control unit
of this unit 129
Spotify Connect function 130
Playing Spotify music with this unit 130
Convenience functions 131
Performing repeat playback 132
Performing random playback 132
Registering to Favorites 133
Playing back content added to the “Save to Favorites” 133
Deleting content added to favorites 134
Searching content with keywords (Text Search) 134
Playing back music and a favorite picture at the same time
(Slideshow) 135
Setting the Slideshow Interval 136
Adjusting the audibility of dialog and vocals (Dialog Enhancer) 136
Adjusting the volume of each channel to match the input source
(Channel Level Adjust) 137
Adjusting the tone (Tone) 138
Displaying your desired video during audio playback (Video
Select) 139
Adjusting the picture quality for your viewing environment (Picture
Mode) 140
Playing the same music in all zones (All Zone Stereo) 141
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
4
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Selecting a sound mode 142
Selecting a sound mode 143
Direct playback 144
Pure Direct playback 144
Auto surround playback 145
HDMI control function 156
Setting procedure 156
Sleep timer function 157
Using the sleep timer 158
Smart select function 159
Calling up the settings 160
Changing the settings 161
Web control function 162
Controlling the unit from a web control 162
Panel lock function 164
Disabling all key button operations 164
Disabling all button operations except VOLUME 164
Canceling the Panel lock function 165
Remote lock function 166
Disabling the sensor function of the remote control unit 166
Enabling the remote sensor function 166
Switches light illumination on/off 167
Playback in ZONE2/ZONE3 (Separate room) 168
Connecting ZONE 168
Playback in ZONE2/ZONE3 173
Settings
Menu map 175
Menu operations 178
Inputting characters 179
Using the keyboard screen 180
Audio 181
Dialog Level Adjust 181
Subwoofer Level Adjust 181
Surround Parameter 182
M-DAX 185
Audio Delay 186
Volume 186
Audyssey 187
Graphic EQ 191
Video 193
Picture Adjust 193
HDMI Setup 195
Output Settings 199
Component Video Out 203
On Screen Display 204
TV Format 205
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
5
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Inputs 206
Input Assign 206
Source Rename 208
Hide Sources 208
Source Level 208
Input Select 209
Speakers 210
Audyssey® Setup 210
Procedure for speaker settings (Audyssey® Setup) 212
Error messages 218
Retrieving Audyssey® Setup settings 220
Manual Setup 221
Amp Assign 221
Speaker Config. 236
Distances 240
Levels 241
Crossovers 242
Bass 243
Front Speaker 244
2ch Playback 244
Network 247
Information 247
Connection 247
Wi-Fi Setup 248
Settings 250
IP Control 251
Friendly Name 252
Diagnostics 252
Maintenance Mode 253
General 254
Language 254
ECO 254
ZONE2 Setup / ZONE3 Setup 256
Zone Rename 258
Smart Select Names 258
Trigger Out 1 / Trigger Out 2 258
Front Display 259
Information 259
Usage Data 261
Firmware 262
Setup Lock 264
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
6
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Operating external devices with the remote control unit 265
Registering preset codes 266
Operating devices 269
Check the registered preset code 272
Initializing registered preset codes 272
Operating learn function 273
Remembering remote control codes from other devices 274
Delete saved remote control codes 275
Setting the back light 276
Disabling the backlight 276
Turning the backlight on 276
Specifying the zone used with the remote control unit 277
Tips
Tips 279
Troubleshooting 281
Resetting factory settings 299
Appendix
About HDMI 300
Video conversion function 303
Playing back a USB memory devices 305
Playing back a Bluetooth device 306
Playing back a file saved on a PC or NAS 307
Playing back Internet Radio 308
Personal memory plus function 308
Last function memory 308
Sound modes and channel output 309
Sound modes and surround parameters 311
Types of input signals, and corresponding sound modes 314
Explanation of terms 317
Trademark information 328
Specifications 330
Index 336
List of preset codes 339
License 350
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
7
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Thank you for purchasing this Marantz product.
To ensure proper operation, please read this owner’s manual carefully before using the product.
After reading this manual, be sure to keep it for future reference.
Accessories
Check that the following parts are supplied with the product.
. .
. .
.
Quick Start Guide CD-ROM
(Owner’s Manual) Safety Instructions Notes on radio Warranty
(for USA/for CANADA)
. . . . .
Cable labels Power cord FM indoor antenna AM loop antenna Sound calibration
microphone
(ACM1HB)
. .
.
.
Sound calibration
microphone stand Remote control unit
(RC026SR) R03/AAA batteries External antennas for
Bluetooth/wireless
connectivity
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
8
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Inserting the batteries
1Remove the rear lid in the direction of the arrow and
remove it.
.
2Insert two batteries correctly into the battery
compartment as indicated.
.
R03/AAA batteries
3Put the rear cover back on.
NOTE
0To prevent damage or leakage of battery fluid:
0Do not use a new battery together with an old one.
0Do not use two different types of batteries.
0Remove the batteries from the remote control unit if it will not be in use for long
periods.
0If the battery fluid should leak, carefully wipe the fluid off the inside of the battery
compartment and insert new batteries.
Operating range of the remote control
unit
Point the remote control unit at the remote sensor when operating it.
.
30°
Approx. 23 ft/7 m
30°
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
9
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Features
High quality sound
0With discrete circuit technology, the power amplifier provides
identical quality for all 9-channels (165 Watts x 9-channels)
For optimum realism and stunning dynamic range, the power amplifier
section features discrete power devices (not integrated circuitry).
By using high current, high power discrete power devices, the amplifier
is able to easily drive high quality speakers.
0Dolby Atmos (v p. 318)
This unit is equipped with a decoder that supports Dolby Atmos, a
completely new audio format. The placement or movement of sound is
accurately reproduced by the addition of overhead speakers, enabling
you to experience an incredibly natural and realistic surround sound
field.
0Current feedback amplifier
This unit uses a high-speed current feedback amplifier circuit for its
preamplifier so that signals from a Blu-ray Disc player and other
equipment that support high-definition audio formats can be amplified
with high fidelity. The high-speed current feedback amplifier also
reproduces a natural sound space.
0Audyssey DSX® (v p. 190)
This unit is equipped with Audyssey DSX® processor. By connecting
front height speakers to this unit and playing back with Audyssey DSX®
processing you can experience a more vertically expansive front
soundstage. By connecting two front wide speakers, you can
experience a wider and more expanded front soundstage.
0Audyssey LFC™ (Low Frequency Containment) (v p. 189)
Audyssey LFC™ solves the problem of low frequency sounds
disturbing people in neighboring rooms or apartments. Audyssey
LFC™ dynamically monitors the audio content and removes the low
frequencies that pass through walls, floors and ceilings. It then applies
psychoacoustic processing to restore the perception of low bass for
listeners in the room. The result is great sound that no longer disturbs
the neighbors.
0Discrete subwoofers and Audyssey Sub EQ HT™ (v p. 211)
The unit has two subwoofer output capability and can adjust the level
and delay for each subwoofer individually.
Audyssey Sub EQ HT™ makes the integration seamless by first
compensating for any level and delay differences between the two
subwoofers and then applying Audyssey MultEQ® XT32 to both
subwoofers together for improved deep bass response and detail.
0DTS Neo:X (v p. 142)
This technology enables the playback of 2-channel source audio or
7.1/5.1 multi-channel source audio through a maximum 9.1-channel
speakers, achieving an even broader soundstage.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
10
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

High performance
04K 60Hz input/output supported
.
4K 60p
4:4:4
4K 60p
4:4:4
When 4K Ultra HD (High Definition) is used, an input/output speed of 60
frames per second (60p) is achieved for video signals. When connected
to 4K Ultra HD and 60p video signal input compatible TV, you can enjoy
the sense of realism only available from high-definition images, even
when viewing fast-moving video.
This unit also supports image processing for 4K 60p, 4:4:4 and 24-bit
videos. By processing the video at the original resolution, this unit lets
you enjoy flawless, high-definition picture quality.
0Digital video processor upscales analog video signals (SD
resolution) to HD (720p/1080p) and 4K (v p. 201)
.
4K 4K
Up to 1080p
4K
Up scaling
This unit is equipped with a 4K video upscaling function that allows
analog video or SD (Standard Definition) video to be output via HDMI at
4K (3840 × 2160 pixels) resolution. This function enables the device to
be connected to a TV using a single HDMI cable, and produces high
definition images for any video source.
0Equipped with HDMI ZONE2 output (v p. 168)
The ZONE2 multi-room output includes an HDMI output that lets you
enjoy a different A/V source in that room, with another program playing
in the main room.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
11
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

0HDMI connections enable connection to various digital AV
devices (8 inputs, 3 output)
.
83
/OutIn
For connection to a broad range of digital sources, this unit features 8
HDMI inputs, including 1 on the front panel that lets you quickly and
conveniently connect a camcorder, game console or other HDMI-
equipped device. There are dual HDMI outputs for the main room, and a
third HDMI output for another room.
0The device is equipped with a AirPlay® function in addition to
network functions such as Internet radio etc. (v p. 127)
.
You can enjoy a wide variety of content, including listening to Internet
Radio, playing audio files stored on your PC, and displaying
photographs stored on your PC on our television.
This unit also supports Apple AirPlay which lets you stream your music
library from an iPhone®, iPad®, iPod touch® or iTunes®.
0Playback of DSD and FLAC files via USB and networks
This unit supports the playback of high resolution audio formats such as
DSD (2.8 MHz) and FLAC 192 kHz files. It provides high quality
playback of high resolution files.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
12
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

0Wireless connection with Bluetooth devices can be carried out
easily (v p. 89)
.
You can enjoy music simply by connecting wirelessly with your
smartphone, tablet, PC, etc.
0Compatible with the “Marantz Remote App”z for performing basic
operations of the unit with an iPad, iPhone or Android™ devices
(Google, Amazon Kindle Fire)
“Marantz Remote App” is application software that allows you to
perform basic operations with an iPad, iPhone, Android smartphone or
Android tablet such as turning the unit ON/OFF, controlling the volume,
and switching the source.
zDownload the appropriate “Marantz Remote App” for your iOS or Android
devices. This unit needs to be connected to the same LAN or Wi-Fi (wireless
LAN) network that the iPhone or iPod touch is connected to.
0Multi-Room audio (v p. 141)
.
【MAIN ZONE】【ZONE2】/【ZONE3】
You can select and play back the respective inputs in MAIN ZONE,
ZONE2 and ZONE3.
In addition, when the All Zone Stereo function is used, the music being
played back in MAIN ZONE can be enjoyed in all the zones at the same
time. This is useful when you want to let the BGM propagate throughout
the whole house.
0Energy-saving design
This unit is equipped with an ECO Mode function that allows you to
enjoy music and movies while reducing the power consumption during
use, and also an auto-standby function that automatically turns off the
power supply when the unit is not in use. This helps reduce
unnecessary power use.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
13
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Easy operation
0“Setup Assistant” provides easy-to-follow setup instructions
First select the language when prompted. Then simply follow the
instructions displayed on the TV screen to set up the speakers, network,
etc.
0Easy to use Graphical User Interface
This unit is equipped with a Graphical User Interface for improved
operability.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
14
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

.
u
ewqytr
APower operation button (X)
Used to turn the power of the MAIN ZONE (room where this unit is
located) on/off (standby). (v p. 79)
BPower indicator
This is lit as follows according to the power status:
0Off: Power on
0Red: Normal standby
0Orange:
0When “HDMI Pass Through” is set to “On” (v p. 197)
0When “HDMI Control” is set to “On” (v p. 197)
0When “IP Control” is set to “Always On” (v p. 251)
CINPUT SELECTOR knob
These selects the input source. (v p. 79)
DMain display
This displays various pieces of information. (v p. 20)
ERemote control sensor
This receives signals from the remote control unit. (v p. 9)
FVOLUME knob
These adjusts the volume level. (v p. 80)
GDoor
When you are using buttons and/or connectors behind the door, press
the bottom of the door to open it. Be careful not to catch your fingers
when closing the door.
.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
16
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

With the door open
.
y u ow
qer ti
ADYNAMIC EQ button
This switches the Dynamic EQ settings. (v p. 188)
BPURE DIRECT button/indicator
This switches the sound mode between Direct, Pure Direct and Auto.
(v p. 144 - 145)
This lights when the Pure Direct mode is selected as the sound mode.
CM-DAX button/indicator
This enables the M-DAX mode. (v p. 185)
This lights when the M-DAX mode is selected.
DDynamic Volume button (DYNAMIC VOL)
This switches the Dynamic Volume settings. (v p. 189)
ESub display
This displays various pieces of information. (v p. 22)
FBACK button
This returns to the previous screen. (v p. 178)
GCursor buttons (uio p)
These select items. (v p. 178)
HENTER button
This determines the selection. (v p. 178)
ISETUP button
This displays the menu on the TV screen. (v p. 178)
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
17
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

.
Q0 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q5 Q6 Q7
JMOVIE button
This switches the sound mode to “Movie”. (v p. 143)
KMUSIC button
This switches the sound mode to “Music”. (v p. 143)
LGAME button
This switches the sound mode to “Game”. (v p. 143)
MAudyssey DSX® button (A-DSX)
This switches the Audyssey DSX® settings. (v p. 190)
NSpeaker A/B switching button (SPKR A/B)
This sets the front speakers to use. (v p. 244)
OHDMI OUT button
This sets the HDMI monitor output. (v p. 196)
PDIMMER button
Each press of this switches the brightness of the display. (v p. 259)
QSTATUS button
Each press of this switches the status information that is shown on the
display. (v p. 83)
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
18
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

.
W1 W2 W3 W4 W5
Q8
Q9
W0
RZONE SELECT button
These switch the zone (MAIN ZONE, ZONE2, ZONE3) that is operated
through the remote control unit. (v p. 173, 178)
SZONE2 ON/OFF button
This turns the power of ZONE2 on/off. (v p. 173)
TZONE3 ON/OFF button
This turns the power of ZONE3 on/off. (v p. 173)
UHeadphones jack (PHONES)
This is used to connect headphones.
When the headphones are plugged into this jack, audio will no longer
be output from the connected speakers or from the PRE OUT
connectors.
NOTE
To prevent hearing loss, do not raise the volume level excessively when using
headphones.
VSETUP MIC jack
This is used to connect the supplied Sound calibration microphone.
(v p. 213)
WUSB port
This is used to connect USB storages (such as USB memory devices)
and the USB cable supplied with iPod. (v p. 69)
XAUX1 HDMI connector
This is used to connect HDMI output compatible devices such as video
camcorders and game consoles. (v p. 66)
YAUX1 INPUT connector
Used to connect analog output compatible devices such as video
camcorders and game consoles. (v p. 66)
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
19
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Display
oMain Display
The input source name, sound mode, setting values and other information are displayed here.
nStandard display
.
w eq
ALight illumination
When the power to this device is switched on, the surrounding area is lit
blue. The settings can be changed so the light does not switch on.
(v p. 167)
BVolume indicator
CInput source indicator
The currently selected input source name is displayed.
If the input source name has been changed using “Source
Rename” (v p. 208) in the menu, the input source name after the
change is displayed.
nTuner display
These light up according to the reception conditions when the input source
is set to “HD Radio”.
.
rt
DLights up when the broadcast is properly tuned in.
EIn the FM mode, this lights up when receiving stereo broadcasts.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
20
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

nSleep timer indicator
.
y
FThis lights when the sleep mode is selected. (v p. 157)
nZONE2/ZONE3 power on display
.
u i
GThis lights up when ZONE2 (separate room) power is turned on.
(v p. 173)
HThis lights up when ZONE3 (separate room) power is turned on.
(v p. 173)
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
21
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oSub Display
.
Q
0
Q
1
Q
2
iuoyt
rewq
GH I
JKL
AInput signal indicators
The respective indicator will light corresponding to the input signal.
(v p. 209)
BDecoder indicators
These light when Dolby or DTS signals are input or when the Dolby or
DTS decoder is running.
CAudyssey® indicator
This lights when “MultEQ® XT32”, “Dynamic EQ”, “Dynamic Volume”,
“Audyssey DSX®” or “Audyssey LFCTM” is set. (v p. 187 - 190)
DTuner reception mode indicators
These light up according to the reception conditions when the input
source is set to “HD Radio”.
TUNED: Lights up when the broadcast is properly tuned in.
STEREO: Lights up when receiving FM stereo broadcasts.
EMonitor output indicator
These light according to the HDMI monitor output setting. When set to
“Auto(Dual)”, the indicators light according to connection status.
FMULTI ZONE indicator
This lights up when ZONE2 or ZONE3 (separate room) power is turned
on. (v p. 173)
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
22
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

.
Q0 Q1 Q2
iuo
GSleep timer indicator
This lights when the sleep mode is selected. (v p. 158)
HMUTE indicator
This blinks while the sound is muted. (v p. 80, 174)
IVolume indicator
JInformation display
The input source name, sound mode, setting values and other
information are displayed here.
KFront speaker indicator
This lights according to the setting of the front A and B speakers.
LInput/output signal channel indicators
The channel for input/output signals is displayed according to the
setting configured for “Channel Indicators”. (v p. 259)
0When “Channel Indicators” is set to “Output” (Default)
These light when audio signals are being output from the speakers.
0When “Channel Indicators” is set to “Input”
These light corresponding to the channels that include the input
signals.
When playing HD Audio sources, the A indicator lights when a
signal from an extension channel (a channel other than the front,
center, surround, surround back, front height, front wide or LFE
channel) is input.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
23
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

.
qw tryeuq
ABluetooth/wireless LAN antenna connectors
Used to connect the included external antennas for Bluetooth/wireless
connectivity when connecting to a network via wireless LAN, or when
connecting to a handheld device via Bluetooth. (v p. 74)
APlace the external antennas for Bluetooth/wireless connectivity
evenly over the screw terminal of rear.
BTurn clockwise until the antennas is fully connected.
CRotate the antenna upwards for best reception.
.
qwe
BDC OUT jack
Used to connect devices equipped with the trigger function.
(v p. 76)
CDigital audio connectors (DIGITAL AUDIO)
Used to connect devices equipped with digital audio connectors.
(v p. 61)
DRS-232C connector
Used to connect home automation controller devices fitted with
RS-232C connectors. Consult the owner’s manual of the home
automation controller for more information about serial control of this
unit.
EFLASHER IN jack
Used when using a control BOX or other such control devices to control
this unit.
FSIGNAL GND terminal
Used to connect a ground wire for the turntable. (v p. 67)
GREMOTE CONTROL jacks
Used to connect infrared receivers/transmitters in order to operate this
unit and external devices from a different room. (v p. 75)
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
25
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

.
Q2 Q3 Q5Q4 Q6 Q7
oiQ0 Q1
HVideo connectors (VIDEO)
Used to connect devices equipped with video connectors.
(v p. 62)
IHDMI connectors
Used to connect devices equipped with HDMI connectors.
(v p. 60)
JNETWORK connector
Used to connect to a LAN cable when connecting to a wired LAN
network. (v p. 73)
KAC inlet (AC IN)
Used to connect the power cord. (v p. 77)
LFM/AM antenna terminals (ANTENNA)
Used to connect FM antennas and AM loop antennas. (v p. 71)
MAnalog audio connectors (AUDIO)
Used to connect devices equipped with analog audio connectors.
(v p. 64)
N7.1-channel input connectors (7.1CH IN)
Used to connect to a device that has multi-channel audio output
connectors. (v p. 68)
OSpeaker terminals (SPEAKERS)
Used to connect speakers. (v p. 39)
PPRE OUT connectors
Used to connect a subwoofer with built-in amplifier or an external power
amplifier. (v p. 40, 58)
QComponent video connectors (COMPONENT VIDEO)
Used to connect devices equipped with component video connectors.
(v p. 62)
NOTE
Do not touch the inner pins of the connectors on the rear panel. Electrostatic
discharge may cause permanent damage to the unit.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
26
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Remote control unit
.
q
e
w
r
t
y
qw e
ADisplay
ALEARN indicator
This is lit when setting the learning function for the remote control unit.
(v p. 273)
BInformation display
0This displays “AVR” when operating this unit.
0This displays the input source name when operating an external
device.
0This displays “TV” when operating TV.
Cl indicator
This is lit when signals are sent from the remote control unit.
BAVR operation button
When preset codes are registered to the remote control unit, press this
button and then operate the menu on the unit.
CSET button
This is used for various settings on the remote control unit.
(v p. 265, 273, 276, 277)
DZONE SELECT button
These switch the zone (MAIN ZONE, ZONE2, ZONE3) that is operated
through the remote control unit. (v p. 173, 178)
EDevice operation buttons (DEVICE X / DEVICE MENU)
These turn the power of external devices on/off and call up menus.
Preset codes need to be registered in order to use these buttons.
(v p. 266)
FInput source select buttons
These select the input source. (v p. 79, 173)
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
27
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

.
i
u
Q0
Q2
Q3
Q4
o
Q1
GSLEEP button
This sets the sleep timer. (v p. 157)
HChannel/page search buttons (CH/PAGE df)
These select radio stations registered to presets or switch pages.
(v p. 83, 100)
IECO Mode button
This switches to ECO Mode. (v p. 254)
JInformation button (INFO)
This displays the status information on the TV screen. (v p. 260)
KCursor buttons (uio p)
These select items. (v p. 178)
LBACK button
This returns to the previous screen. (v p. 178)
MHOME button
This takes you to the Home screen (Top screen) when the input source
is Online Music or iPod/USB. (v p. 83)
NSystem buttons
These perform playback related operations. (v p. 83)
0Skip buttons (8, 9)
0Play button (1)
0Search buttons (6, 7)
0Pause button (3)
0Stop button (2)
Tuning up / Tuning down buttons (TUNE +, –)
These select either FM broadcast or AM broadcast. (v p. 96)
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
28
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

.
Q9
W0
Q8
Q5
Q6
Q7
OSMART SELECT buttons (1 - 4)
These call up settings registered to each button, such as input source,
volume level and sound mode settings. (v p. 159)
PSOUND MODE buttons
These select the sound mode. (v p. 142)
0MOVIE button
0MUSIC button
0GAME button
0PURE button
QNumber buttons
These enter numbers into the unit. (v p. 96)
RRemote control signal transmitter
This transmits signals from the remote control unit. (v p. 9)
SPOWER button (X)
This turns the power on/off. (v p. 79, 173)
TTV operation buttons (TV X / TV MENU / TV INPUT)
These turn the TV power on/off, switch the TV input and call up menus.
Preset codes need to be registered in order to use these buttons.
(v p. 269)
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
29
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

.
W1
W5
W3
W2
W7
W6
W6
W4
UTV operation buttons (TV X / TV INPUT)
These turn the TV power on/off, switch the TV input and call up menus.
Preset codes need to be registered in order to use these buttons.
(v p. 269)
VLight button
This turns on the backlight for approx. 2 seconds. (v p. 276)
WVOLUME buttons (df)
These adjusts the volume level. (v p. 80, 174)
XMUTE button (:)
This mutes the output audio. (v p. 80, 174)
YOPTION button
This displays the option menu on the TV screen. (v p. 131)
ZENTER button
This determines the selection. (v p. 178)
aSETUP button
This displays the menu on the TV screen. (v p. 178)
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
30
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oContents
Connecting speakers 32
Connecting a TV 59
Connecting a playback device 63
Connecting an iPod or USB memory device to the USB port 69
Connecting an HD radio receiver 71
Connecting to a home network (LAN) 73
Connecting an external control device 75
Connecting the power cord 77
NOTE
0Do not plug in the power cord until all connections have been completed.
However, when the “Setup Assistant” is running, follow the instructions in the
“Setup Assistant” (page 9 in the separate “Quick Start Guide”) screen for making
connections. (During “Setup Assistant” operation, the input/output connectors do
not conduct current.)
0Do not bundle power cords together with connection cables. Doing so can result in
noise.
oCables used for connections
Provide necessary cables according to the devices you want to
connect.
Speaker cable
.
Subwoofer cable
.
HDMI cable
.
Component video cable
.
Video cable
.
Coaxial digital cable
.
Optical cable
.
Audio cable
.
R
L
R
L
LAN cable
.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
Connections
31
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Connecting speakers
Install speakers and connect them to this unit. (v p. 32, 39)
Speaker installation
Determine the speaker system depending on the number of speakers you
are using and install each speaker and subwoofer in the room.
Speaker installation is explained using this example of a typical
installation.
.
C
FL FR
SBL SBR
SB
SW1
SW2
FWL FWR
SL SR
FL/FR (Front
speaker left/right):
Place the FRONT left and right speakers an equal
distance from the main listening position. The distance
between each speaker and your TV should also be the
same.
C (Center
speaker):Place the CENTER speaker in between the front
speakers and above or below your TV.
SL/SR (Surround
speaker left/right):
Place the SURROUND left and right speakers an
equal distance to the left and right sides of the main
listening position. If you don’t have surround back
speakers, move the surround speakers slightly behind
your listening position.
SBL/SBR
(Surround back
speaker left/right):
Place the SURROUND BACK left and right speakers
an equal distance from the main listening position and
directly behind the main listening position. When using
a single surround back speaker (SB), place it directly
behind the listening position.
FWL/FWR
(Front wide speakers left/
right):
Place the FRONT WIDE left and right speakers
outside of the front left and right speakers so that there
is an equal distance between all front speakers.
SW 1/2 (Subwoofer) : Place the SUBWOOFER at a convenient location near
the front speakers. If you have two subwoofers, place
them asymmetrically across the front of your room.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
32
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

.
FHL FHR
TRR
TRL
TFR
TFL
RHL RHR
TMR
TML
FHL/FHR (Front
height speaker left/
right):
Place the FRONT HEIGHT left and right speakers
directly above the front speakers. Mount them as
close to the ceiling as possible and aim them
towards the main listening position.
TFL/TFR (Top front
speaker left/right):
Mount the TOP FRONT left and right speakers on
the ceiling slightly in front of your main listening
position and aligned with the left and right front
speakers.
TML/TMR (Top
middle speaker left/
right):
Mount the TOP MIDDLE left and right speakers
directly above the main listening position and
aligned with the left and right front speakers.
TRL/TRR (Top rear
speaker left/right):
Mount the TOP REAR left and right speakers on
the ceiling slightly behind your main listening
position and aligned with the left and right front
speakers.
RHL/RHR (Rear
height speaker left/
right):
Place the REAR HEIGHT left and right speakers
directly behind the main listening position. Mount
them as close to the ceiling as possible and
aligned with the left and right front speakers.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
33
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

.
FDL FDR
BDL BDR
SDL SDR
FDL/FDR (Front
Dolby speaker left/
right):
Place the FRONT DOLBY ENABLED speaker on
the front speaker. For a Dolby enabled speaker
integrated with a front speaker, place the Dolby
enabled speaker instead of the front speaker.
SDL/SDR (Surround
Dolby speaker left/
right):
Place the SURROUND DOLBY ENABLED speaker
on the surround speaker. For a Dolby enabled
speaker integrated with a surround speaker, place
the Dolby enabled speaker instead of the surround
speaker.
BDL/BDR (Back
Dolby speaker left/
right):
Place the BACK DOLBY ENABLED speaker on the
surround back speaker. For a Dolby enabled
speaker integrated with a surround back speaker,
place the Dolby enabled speaker instead of the
surround back speaker.
About Dolby enabled speakers
Dolby enabled speakers reflect the sound off the ceiling to allow the sound
to come from over your head by using a special upward-pointing speaker
that is placed on the floor.
You can enjoy the Dolby Atmos 3D sound even in an environment where
speakers cannot be installed on the ceiling.
.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
34
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

0This unit is compatible with Audyssey DSX®, Dolby Atmos and DTS Neo:X which
offers an even wider and deeper surround sensation. (v p. 317, 318, 321)
When using Audyssey DSX®, install front wide speakers or front height speakers.
0Use the illustration below as a guide for how high each speaker should be
installed. The height does not need to be exactly the same.
.
z1
z2
z3
z4
z5
Point slightly
downwards
Front height
speaker
z1 30° - 45°
z4 125° - 150°
z2 30° - 55° z3 65° - 100°
z5 135° - 150°
GViewed from the sideH
Top middle speaker
Top front speaker Top rear speaker
Front speaker Surround
speaker
Surround
back
speaker
Front wide
speaker
Point slightly
downwards
Rear height
speaker
.
SL
TRL
RHL RHR
FHL
TML
TFL
FL
SR
TRR
FHR
TMR
TFR
FR
C
GViewed from the topH
Height speakers layout
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
35
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oWhen 7.1-channel speakers are installed using
surround back speakers
.
z1
z2z3
FL
SW C
SL
SBL
FR
SR
SBR
Listening
position
z1:22° - 30° z2:90° - 110° z3:135° - 150°
When using a single surround back speaker, place it directly behind the listening
position.
oWhen 9.1-channel speakers are installed using
front wide speakers
.
z3
z2z1z4
SBL SBR
FL
SW C
SL
FR
SR
FWL FWR
z1: 22° - 30° z2: 55° - 60° z3: 90° - 110° z4: 135° - 150°
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
36
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oLayout including height speakers and top
speakers
nDolby Atmos layout example
Combination of 7.1-channel layout with surround back speaker and
top front/top rear speakers.
.
C
FL FR
SBL SBR
SW
TRR
TRL
TFR
TFL
SL SR
nDTS Neo:X layout example
Combination of 9.1-channel layout with surround back/front wide
speakers, and front height speakers.
.
FHL FHR
C
FL FR
SBL SBR
SW
FWL FWR
SL SR
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
38
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Speaker connection
Here we connect the speakers in the room to this unit.
This section explains how to connect them using typical examples.
NOTE
0Disconnect this unit’s power plug from the power outlet before connecting the
speakers. Also, turn off the subwoofer.
0Connect so that the speaker cable core wires do not protrude from the speaker
terminal. The protection circuit may be activated if the core wires touch the rear
panel or if the + and - sides touch each other. (“Protection circuit” (v p. 327))
0Never touch the speaker terminals while the power cord is connected. Doing so
could result in electric shock. When the “Setup Assistant” (page 9 in the separate
“Quick Start Guide”) is running, follow the instructions in the “Setup Assistant”
screen for making connections. (Power is not supplied to the speaker terminals
while the “Setup Assistant” is running.)
0Use speakers with an impedance of 4 – 16 Ω/ohms.
NOTE
0Carry out the following settings when using a speaker with an impedance of 4 – 6
Ω/ohms.
1. Press and hold the main unit’s ZONE SELECT and STATUS at the same time
for at least 3 seconds.
“Video Format < NTSC>” appears on the display.
2. Press i on the main unit twice.
“Sp.Imp. <8ohms>” appears on the display.
3. Use o or p on the main unit to select the impedance.
6ohms: Select when the impedance for any of the connected speakers
is 6 Ω/ohms.
4ohms: Select when the impedance for any of the connected speakers
is 4 Ω/ohms.
4. Press the main unit’s ENTER to complete the setting.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
39
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oConnecting the speaker cables
Carefully check the left (L) and right (R) channels and + (red) and –
(black) polarities on the speakers being connected to this unit, and be
sure to connect the channels and polarities correctly.
1Peel off about 3/8 inch (10 mm) of sheathing from the
tip of the speaker cable, then either twist the core wire
tightly or terminate it.
.
2
Turn the speaker terminal counterclockwise to loosen it.
.
3Insert the speaker cable’s core wire to the hilt into the
speaker terminal.
.
4Turn the speaker terminal clockwise to tighten it.
.
oConnecting the subwoofer
Use a subwoofer cable to connect the subwoofer. Two subwoofers can
be connected to this unit.
To use two subwoofers, set “Subwoofer” to “2 spkrs” in the “Speaker
Config.” setting. (v p. 236)
The level and distance can be set separately for Subwoofer 1 and
Subwoofer 2.
.
SW2SW1
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
40
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oAbout the speaker cable label (supplied) for
channel identification
The channel display section for speaker terminals on the rear panel is
color-coded for each channel to be identifiable.
Speaker terminals Color
FRONT L White
FRONT R Red
CENTER Green
SURROUND L Light blue
SURROUND R Blue
SURROUND BACK L Beige
SURROUND BACK R Brown
FRONT WIDE L Light Purple
FRONT WIDE R Purple
FRONT HEIGHT L Light Yellow
FRONT HEIGHT R Yellow
TOP FRONT L Light Yellow
TOP FRONT R Yellow
TOP MIDDLE L Light Purple
TOP MIDDLE R Purple
TOP REAR L Light Purple
TOP REAR R Purple
REAR HEIGHT L Light Purple
REAR HEIGHT R Purple
FRONT DOLBY L Light Yellow
FRONT DOLBY R Yellow
SURROUND DOLBY L Light Purple
SURROUND DOLBY R Purple
BACK DOLBY L Light Purple
BACK DOLBY R Purple
SUBWOOFER Black
Attach the speaker cable label for each channel to its speaker cable as
shown in the diagram.
Refer to the table and attach the label to each speaker cable.
Then, make connection so that the color of the speaker terminal
matches that of the speaker cable label.
G How to attach the speaker cable label H
.
This unit
Speaker
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
41
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Speaker configuration and “Amp Assign” settings
This unit has a built-in 9-channel power amplifier. In addition to the basic 5.1-channel system, a variety of speaker systems can be configured by changing
the “Amp Assign” (v p. 221) settings to suit the application, such as 7.1-channel systems, bi-amp connections and 2-channel systems for multi-zone
playback.
Perform “Amp Assign” settings to suit the number of rooms and speaker configuration to be installed. (v p. 221)
Playback speaker in each zone “Amp Assign” settings Connection page
MAIN ZONE ZONE2 ZONE3
5.1-channel playback Not used Not used 7.1ch + ZONE2 (Default) 44
7.1-channel playback (surround back) Not used Not used 7.1ch + ZONE2 (Default) 45
9.1-channel playback Not used Not used 9.1ch 46
11.1-channel playback Not used Not used 11.1ch 47
7.1-channel playback (bi-amp connection of front speakers) Not used Not used 7.1ch (Bi-Amp) 48
9.1-channel playback + 2-channel speakers for stereo playback Not used Not used 9.1ch/2ch Front 49
7.1-channel playback + 2-channel bi-amp speakers for stereo playback Not used Not used 7.1ch/2ch Front (Bi-Amp) 50
7.1-channel playback + front speakers of second unit Not used Not used 7.1ch + Front B 51
7.1-channel playback 2-channel Not used 7.1ch + ZONE2 (Default) 52
7.1-channel playback Not used 2-channel 7.1ch + ZONE3 52
5.1-channel playback (bi-amp connection of front speakers) 2-channel Not used 5.1ch (Bi-Amp) + ZONE2 53
5.1-channel playback 2-channel 2-channel 5.1ch + ZONE2/3 54
7.1-channel playback 1-channel 1-channel 7.1ch + ZONE2/3-MONO 55
Dolby Atmos playback Not used Not used Dolby Atmos 56
The sound mode that can be selected varies according to the speaker configuration. See “Relationship between sound modes and channel output”
(v p. 309) for the sound modes that are supported.
The following pages provide basic connection examples.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
42
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

In addition to the connections described in (v p. 44 - 58), this unit allows for
various speaker connections with the “Amp Assign” setting.
Also refer to the menu screen in “View Terminal Config.” on the “Amp Assign” setting
screen, which shows how to make connections in your environment.
.
CENTER SURROUND
SURROUND BACK
SURROUNDFRONTFRONT
SURROUND BACK
HEIGHT1 HEIGHT1
CENTER SURROUND
SURROUND BACK
SURROUNDFRONT
SURROUND BACK
HEIGHT1 HEIGHT1
FRONT
SUBWOOFER
T.REAR
12
Back
SPEAKERS
AUTO SWITCHING
Speakers/Amp Assign
PRE OUT
Assign Mode
-Height Speakers
-Height Layout
-Wide/Height2 Front Wide
-Pre-out Top Rear
11.1ch
4 Height Speakers
Top Front & Top Rear
AUTO SWITCHING
AUTO SWITCHING
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
43
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

n7.1-channel playback (surround back)
This 7.1-channel surround system is the same as a basic 5.1-channel system but with surround back speakers.
.
FL
SW
SL
FR
SR
SBRSBL
.
SW SBR SBLFR FL C SR SL
When using a single surround back speaker, connect it to the SURROUND BACK L
terminal.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
45
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oAdvanced connections
n9.1-channel playback
This system, which is based on a 5.1-channel system, plays back up to 9.1-channels at the same time.
You can connect speakers for up to 11-channels for MAIN ZONE. When you connect speakers for 10 or more channels, the output speakers
automatically switch according to the input signal and sound mode.
.
FHL
FL
SW C
SL
SBL
FHR
FR
SR
SBR
FWL FWR
.
SW SBR SBL FWR FWL FHR FHLFR FL C SR SL
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
46
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

n11.1-channel playback
This system, which is based on a 5.1-channel system, plays back up to 11.1-channels at the same time.
You can connect speakers for up to 13-channels for MAIN ZONE by using an external power amplifier. When you connect speakers for 12 or more
channels, the output speakers automatically switch according to the input signal and sound mode.
.
C
FL FR
SBL SBR
SW
FWL FWR
TRR
TRL
TFR
TFL
SL SR
.
TFR TFLSW SBR SBL FWR FWLFR FL C SR SL
TRR
Power amplier
TRL
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
47
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

n7.1-channel playback (bi-amp connection of front speakers)
This system plays back 7.1-channels. You can use the bi-amp connection for front speakers. Bi-amp connection is a method to connect separate
amplifiers to the tweeter terminal and woofer terminal of a speaker that supports bi-amplification. This connection enables back EMF (power returned
without being output) from the woofer to flow into the tweeter without affecting the sound quality, producing a higher sound quality.
You can connect speakers for up to 9 channels for MAIN ZONE. When you connect speakers for 8 or more channels, the output speakers
automatically switch according to the input signal and sound mode.
.
FHL
SW C
SL
SBL
FHR
SR
SBR
FL
(Bi-Amp)
FR
(Bi-Amp)
.
wqwq
(R) (L)
FLFR
SW SBR SBL FHR FHLCSRSL
NOTE
When making bi-amp connections, be sure to remove the short-circuiting plate or wire between the speaker’s woofer and tweeter terminals.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
48
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

nExclusive 9.1-channel playback + 2-channel playback speakers
You can connect speakers used exclusively for 2-channel playback, which are used for the direct and stereo modes, and speakers used exclusively
for 9.1 multi-channel playback. The speakers used exclusively for multi-channel playback and the speakers used exclusively for 2-channel playback
are automatically switched for playback in accordance with the sound mode.
.
FHL
FLFL’
SW C
SL
SBL
FHR
FR FR’
SR
SBR
FHL
FL
C
SL
SBL
FHR
FR
SR
SBR
FL’ FR’
Multi-channel playback
Switching
2-channel playback
.
SW SBR SBL FR’ FL’ FHR FHLFR FL C SR SL
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
49
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

nExclusive 7.1-channel playback + 2-channel playback (bi-amp connection) speakers
You can connect speakers used exclusively for 2-channel playback, which are used for the direct and stereo modes, and speakers used exclusively
for 7.1 multi-channel playback. You can use the bi-amp connection for the speakers exclusively used for 2-channel playback. The speakers used
exclusively for multi-channel playback and the speakers used exclusively for 2-channel playback are automatically switched for playback in
accordance with the sound mode.
.
FLFL’
SW C
SL
SBL
FR FR’
SR
SBR
FL C
SL
SBL
FR
SR
SBR
FL’ FL’
Multi-channel playback
Switching
(Bi-Amp) (Bi-Amp)
2-channel playback
FL’ FR’
.
wqwq
(R) (L)
FR FL
FL’FR’
SW SBR SBLCSRSL
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
50
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

n7.1-channel playback + front speakers of second unit
This system enables switching playback between front speakers A and B as desired.
You can connect speakers for up to 9-channels for MAIN ZONE. When you connect speakers for 8 or more channels, the output speakers
automatically switch according to the input signal and sound mode.
.
FHL
SW C
SL
SBL
FHR
SR
SBR
FLFL
(B) (A) FRFR
(A) (B)
.
SW SBR SBL FHR FHLCSRSL
FR
(A) FL
(A) FR
(B) FL
(B)
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
51
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

n7.1-channel playback (MAIN ZONE) + 2-channel playback (ZONE2 or ZONE3)
This type of configuration plays back 7.1-channels in MAIN ZONE and 2-channels in ZONE2.
(Speakers can output audio from ZONE3 instead of ZONE2 (Assign Mode: 7.1ch + ZONE3).)
You can connect speakers for up to 9-channels for MAIN ZONE. When you connect speakers for 8 or more channels, the output speakers
automatically switch according to the input signal and sound mode.
.
MAIN ZONE
ZONE2
FHL
FL
SW C
SL
SBL
FHR
FR
SR
SBR
ZONE2
L
ZONE2
R
.
SW SBR SBL FHR FHLFR FL C SR SL
ZONE2
RZONE2
L
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
52
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

n5.1-channel playback (bi-amp connection of front speakers: MAIN ZONE) + 2-channel playback
(ZONE2)
This type of configuration plays back 5.1-channels in MAIN ZONE and 2-channels in ZONE2. You can use the bi-amp connection for front speakers in
MAIN ZONE.
.
SW C
SL SR
ZONE2
L
ZONE2
R
FL
(Bi-Amp)
FR
(Bi-Amp)
MAIN ZONE
ZONE2
.
wqwq
(R) (L)
SW CSRSL
FLFR
ZONE2
RZONE2
L
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
53
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

n5.1-channel playback (MAIN ZONE) + 2-channel playback (ZONE2) + 2-channel playback (ZONE3)
This type of configuration plays back 5.1-channels in MAIN ZONE and 2-channels in ZONE2 and ZONE3.
.
FL
SW C
SL
FR
SR
ZONE2
LZONE2
RZONE3
LZONE3
R
MAIN ZONE
ZONE2 ZONE3
.
SW
CSRSL
FR FL
ZONE3
RZONE3
L
ZONE2
RZONE2
L
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
54
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

n7.1-channel playback (MAIN ZONE) + 1-channel playback (ZONE2) + 1-channel playback (ZONE3)
This type of configuration plays back 7.1-channels in MAIN ZONE and 1-channel (monaural) in ZONE2 and ZONE3.
You can connect speakers for up to 9-channels for MAIN ZONE. When you connect speakers for 8 or more channels, the output speakers
automatically switch according to the input signal and sound mode.
.
FHL
FL
SW C
SL
SBL
FR
SR
SBR
ZONE2
Mono
ZONE3
Mono
FHR
MAIN ZONE
ZONE2 ZONE3
.
SW SBR SBL FHR FHLFR FL C SR SL
ZONE3
Mono ZONE2
Mono
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
55
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oDolby Atmos
This speaker configuration is optimized for Dolby Atmos playback.
n11.1-channel system
This system configuration plays back 11.1-channels by using an external power amplifier.
.
C
FL FR
SBL SBR
SW
TRR
TRL
TFR
TFL
SL SR
.
TFR TFLSW SBR SBLFR FL C SR SL
TRR
Power amplier
TRL
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
56
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oConnecting an external power amplifier
You can use this unit as a pre-amp by connecting an external power amplifier to the PRE OUT connectors. By adding a power amplifier to each
channel, the realness of the sound can be further enhanced.
Select the terminal to use and connect the device.
When using just one surround back speaker, connect it to
the left channel (L) terminal.
L
L
R
R
L
L
R
R
L
L
R
R
L
L
R
R
L
L
R
R
L
L
R
R
CENTER
RL
FRONT
AUDIO
SUB-
WOOFER
2
AUDIO
SUB-
WOOFER
1
AUDIO
SURROUND
BACK
RL RL
SURROUND
RL
RL
HEIGHT2 HEIGHT1
RL
FRONT
WIDE
Power ampliers
Subwoofer
(Primary)
Subwoofer
(Secondary)
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
58
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Connecting a TV
Connect a TV to this unit so that the input video is output to the TV. You can also enjoy audio from the TV on this unit.
How to connect a TV depends on the connectors and functions equipped on the TV.
ARC (Audio Return Channel) function plays TV audio on this unit by sending the TV audio signal to this unit via HDMI cable.
.
No
Yes
Is the TV equipped with an HDMI connector?
Is the TV compatible with the ARC (Audio Return Channel) ?
Yes No
“Connection 1 : TV equipped with an HDMI
connector and compatible with the ARC (Audio
Return Channel)” (v p. 60)
“Connection 2 : TV equipped with an HDMI
connector and incompatible with the ARC (Audio
Return Channel)” (v p. 61)
“Connection 3 : TV equipped without
an HDMI connector” (v p. 62)
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
59
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Connection 1 : TV equipped with an HDMI connector and compatible with the ARC
(Audio Return Channel)
Use an HDMI cable to connect a TV that is compatible with the ARC function to this unit.
Set “HDMI Control” to “On” when using a TV that supports the ARC function. (v p. 197)
When using the HDMI control function, connect to the HDMI
MONITOR 1 connector.
(ARC)
IN
HDMI
TV
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
60
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Connection 2 : TV equipped with an HDMI connector and incompatible with the ARC
(Audio Return Channel)
Use an HDMI cable to connect the TV to this unit.
To listen to audio from TV on this unit, use an optical cable to connect the TV to this unit.
.
OUT
OPTICAL
OUT IN
IN
HDMI
TV
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
61
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Connection 3 : TV equipped without an HDMI connector
Use a component video or a video cable to connect the TV to this unit.
To listen to audio from TV on this unit, use an optical cable to connect the TV to this unit.
.
OUT
OPTICAL
OUT
IN
VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO
YP
BPR
IN
IN
or
TV
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
62
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Connecting a playback device
This unit is equipped with three types of video input connectors (HDMI, component video and composite video) and three types of audio input connectors
(HDMI, digital audio and audio).
Select input connectors on this unit according to the connectors equipped on the device you want to connect.
If the device connected to this unit is equipped with an HDMI connector, it is recommended to use HDMI connections.
In the HDMI connection, audio and video signals can be transmitted through a single HDMI cable.
0“Connecting a set-top box (Satellite tuner/cable TV)” (v p. 64)
0“Connecting a DVD player or Blu-ray Disc player” (v p. 65)
0“Connecting a video camcorder or game console” (v p. 66)
0“Connecting a turntable” (v p. 67)
0Connect devices to this unit as indicated by the input sources printed on the audio/video input connectors of this unit.
0The source that is assigned to the HDMI IN, DIGITAL AUDIO IN, COMPONENT VIDEO IN, VIDEO IN and AUDIO IN connectors can be changed. See “Input Assign” on how
to change the input source assigned to the input connectors. (v p. 206)
0To play back audio signals that are input to this unit on a TV connected via HDMI, set in the menu “HDMI Audio Out” to “TV”. (v p. 196)
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
63
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Connecting a set-top box (Satellite tuner/cable TV)
This explanation uses the connection with a satellite tuner/cable TV STB as an example.
Select the input connectors on this unit to match the connectors on the device that you want to connect to.
.
RL
RL
OUT
HDMI
OUT
COAXIAL
AUDIO
AUDIO
RL
OUT OUT
VIDEO
VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO
YPBPR
OUT
or or
Satellite tuner/
Cable TV
Satellite tuner/
Cable TV
(HDMI incompatible device)
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
64
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Connecting a DVD player or Blu-ray Disc player
This explanation uses the connection with a DVD player or Blu-ray disc player as an example.
Select the input connectors on this unit to match the connectors on the device that you want to connect to.
.
RL
RL
OUT
COAXIAL
AUDIO
AUDIO
RL
OUT OUT
VIDEO
VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO
YPBPR
OUT
OUT
HDMI
OUT
HDMI
(HDMI incompatible device)
or or
DVD player Blu-ray Disc
player
DVD player
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
65
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Connecting a video camcorder or game console
This explanation uses the connection with a video camcorders as an example.
Connect a playback device to this unit, such as a video camcorder or game console.
.
OUT
HDMI
R
L
R
L
AUDIO
AUDIO
RL
OUT OUT
VIDEO
VIDEO
Video
camcorder
Video camcorder
(HDMI incompatible device)
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
66
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Connecting a turntable
This unit is compatible with turntables equipped with a moving magnet (MM) phono cartridge. When you connect to a turntable with a low output moving
coil (MC) cartridge, use a commercially available MC head amp or a step-up transformer.
If you set this unit’s input source to “PHONO” and you accidentally increase the volume without having a turntable connected, you may hear a hum noise
from the speakers.
NOTE
The earth terminal (SIGNAL GND) of this unit is not for safety grounding
purposes. If this terminal is connected when there is a lot of noise, the noise can
be reduced. Note that depending on the turntable, connecting the ground line
may have the reverse effect of increasing noise. In this case, it is not necessary
to connect the ground line.
GND
AUDIO
OUT
LR
(MM cartridge)
Turntable
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
67
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Connecting a device with a multi-channel output connector
You can connect this unit to an external device fitted with multi-channel sound audio output connectors to enjoy music and video.
To play analog signals input from 7.1CH IN connectors, set “Input Mode” (v p. 209) to “7.1CH IN”.
.
L
L
R
R
L
L
R
R
L
L
R
R
SUB-
WOOFER
CENTER SURROUND
BACK
RL
SURROUND
RL
FRONT
RL
AUDIO
Devices with a multi-channel output connector
(Blu-ray Disc player, DVD player,
External decoder etc.)
The video signal can be connected in the same way as a Blu-ray Disc player/DVD player. “Connecting a DVD player or Blu-ray Disc player” (v p. 65)
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
68
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Connecting an iPod or USB memory device to the USB port
To connect an iPod to this unit, use the USB adapter cable that was supplied with the iPod.
For operating instructions see “Playing an iPod” (v p. 81) or “Playing a USB memory device” (v p. 86).
.
iPod
or
USB memory
device
Marantz does not guarantee that all USB memory devices will operate or receive power. When using a portable USB hard disk drive (HDD) which came with an AC adapter, use
that device’s supplied AC adapter.
NOTE
0USB memory devices will not work via a USB hub.
0It is not possible to use this unit by connecting the unit’s USB port to a PC via a USB cable.
0Do not use an extension cable when connecting a USB memory device. This may cause radio interference with other devices.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
69
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Connecting an HD radio receiver
After connecting the antenna and receiving a broadcast signal, fix the
antenna with tape in a position where the noise level becomes minimal.
(“Listening to an HD Radio™ stations” (v p. 94))
If you are unable to receive a good broadcast signal, we recommend installing an
outdoor antenna. For details, inquire at the retail store where you purchased the unit.
NOTE
0Do not connect two FM antennas simultaneously.
0Make sure the AM loop antenna lead terminals do not touch metal parts of the
panel.
.
wq e
AM loop antenna
(supplied)
FM indoor antenna
(supplied)
White
Black
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
71
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oUsing the AM loop antenna
Suspending on a wall
Suspend directly on a wall without assembling.
.
Nail, tack, etc.
Standing alone
Use the procedure shown above to assemble.
When assembling, refer to “AM loop antenna assembly”.
.
oAM loop antenna assembly
1Put the stand section through the bottom of the loop
antenna from the rear and bend it forward.
2Insert the projecting part into the square hole in the
stand.
.
Projecting part
Square hole
Stand
Loop antenna
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
72
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Connecting to a home network (LAN)
This unit can connect to a network using a wired LAN or wireless LAN.
You can connect this unit to your home network (LAN) to enable various
types of playback and operations as described below.
0Playback of network audio such as Internet Radio and from your media
server(s)
0Playback of music content from online streaming services
0Using the Apple AirPlay function
0Operation on this unit via the network
0Firmware Update
For connections to the Internet, contact an ISP (Internet Service
Provider) or a computer shop.
Wired LAN
To make connections via wired LAN, use a LAN cable to connect the
router to this unit as shown in the figure below.
.
Internet
Modem
PC
Router
To WAN side
To LAN port
To LAN port
NAS
(Network Attached
Storage)
LAN port/ Ethernet
connector
LAN port/ Ethernet
connector
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
73
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Wireless LAN
When connecting to the network via wireless LAN, connect the external
antennas for Bluetooth/wireless connectivity connection to the rear panel
and stand them upright.
See “Wi-Fi Setup” (v p. 248) on how to connect to a wireless LAN
router.
.
Internet
Modem
To WAN side
Router with access point
0When using this unit, we recommend you use a router equipped with the following
functions:
0Built-in DHCP server
This function automatically assigns IP addresses on the LAN.
0Built-in 100BASE-TX switch
When connecting multiple devices, we recommend a switching hub with a
speed of 100 Mbps or greater.
0Only use a shielded STP or ScTP LAN cable (readily available at electronics
stores). (CAT-5 or greater recommended)
0The normal shielded-type LAN cable is recommended.
If a flat-type cable or unshielded-type cable is used, other devices could be
affected by noise.
0When using a router that supports the WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) function, Wi-
Fi connection can be carried out easily.
0When using this unit connected to a network with no DHCP function, configure the
IP address, etc. in “Network”. (v p. 247)
NOTE
0The types of routers that can be used depend on the ISP. Contact your ISP or a
computer shop for details.
0This unit is not compatible with PPPoE. A PPPoE compatible router is required if
your contracted line is not set using PPPoE.
0Do not connect a NETWORK connector directly to the LAN port / Ethernet
connector on your computer.
0Various online services may be discontinued without prior notice.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
74
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Connecting an external control device
REMOTE CONTROL jacks
oPerforming operations by RC on this unit
without visual contact
You can connect an external IR receiver to the REMOTE CONTROL
connectors to perform operations on this unit with the supplied remote
control unit without visual contact. This might be necessary if the unit is
hidden in a cupboard or corner, so you can’t directly point with the
remote control unit to the device.
To do this, disable the remote control signal receiving function
(“Remote lock function” (v p. 166)).
.
RC OUT
Infrared
retransmitter
NOTE
When the remote control signal receiving function is disabled, you can not perform
operations with the remote control unit.
oRemotely connecting Marantz devices
When you are using a Marantz device other than this unit that supports
remote connection, you can transmit remote control signals just by
connecting the device to the REMOTE CONTROL IN/OUT connector
with a monaural cable.
Set the remote control switch located on the rear panel of the
connected audio component to “EXTERNAL” or “EXT.” to use this
feature.
.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
75
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

DC OUT jacks
When a device with DC IN jack is connected, the connected device’s power on/standby can be controlled through linked operation to this unit.
The DC OUT jack outputs a maximum 12 V DC /150 mA electrical signal.
.
12 V DC/150 mA trigger-compatible device
NOTE
0Use a monaural mini-plug cable for connecting the DC OUT jack. Do not use a stereo mini-plug cable.
0If the permissible trigger input level for the connected device is larger than 12 V DC/150 mA, or has shorted, the DC OUT jack cannot be used. In this case, turn off the power
to the unit, and disconnect DC OUT jack.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
76
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oContents
Basic operation
Turning the power on 79
Selecting the input source 79
Adjusting the volume 80
Turning off the sound temporarily (Muting) 80
Selecting a sound mode 142
Playback a device
Playing a DVD player/Blu-ray Disc player 80
Playing an iPod 81
Playing a USB memory device 86
Playing a Bluetooth device 91
Listening to an HD Radio™ station 94
Playback network audio/service
Listening to Internet Radio 105
Playing back files stored on a PC and NAS 109
Viewing photographs on the Flickr site 113
Listening to Pandora®117
Listening to SiriusXM Internet Radio 124
AirPlay function 127
Spotify Connect function 130
Convenience functions
Convenience functions 131
HDMI control function 156
Sleep timer function 157
Smart select function 159
Panel lock function 164
Remote lock function 166
Switches light illumination on/off 167
Other functions
Web control function 162
Playback in ZONE2/ZONE3 (Separate room) 168
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
Playback
78
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Basic operation
.
VOLUME df
POWER X
MUTE :
Input source
select buttons
Turning the power on
1Press POWER X to turn on power to the unit.
0You can press the input source select button when the unit is in standby mode to
turn on the power.
0You can also switch the power to standby by pressing X on the main unit.
Selecting the input source
1Press the input source select button to be played back.
The desired input source can be selected directly.
You can also select the input source by turning INPUT SELECTOR on the main unit.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
79
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Adjusting the volume
1Use VOLUME df to adjust the volume.
0The variable range differs according to the input signal and channel level setting.
0You can also adjust the master volume by turning VOLUME on the main unit.
Turning off the sound temporarily
(Muting)
1Press MUTE :.
0“MUTE” appears on the display.
0: appears on the TV screen.
0The sound is reduced to the level set at “Mute Level” in the menu. (v p. 186)
0To cancel mute, either adjust the sound volume or press MUTE : again.
Playback a DVD player/Blu-ray Disc
player
The following describes the procedure for playing DVD player/Blu-ray Disc
player.
1Prepare for playback.
ATurn on the power of the TV, subwoofer and player.
BChange the TV input to the input of this unit.
2Press POWER X to turn on power to the unit.
3Press DVD or Blu-ray to switch an input source for a
player used for playback.
4Play the DVD player or Blu-ray Disc player.
oSurround playback (v p. 142)
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
80
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Playing an iPod
.
iPod/USB
OPTION
uio p
ENTER
BACK
HOME
CH/PAGE df
1
8 9
6 7
3
2
0You can use the USB cable provided with the iPod to connect the iPod
with the unit’s USB port and enjoy music stored on the iPod.
0For information on the iPod models that can be played back with this
unit, see “Supported iPod/iPhone models” (v p. 70).
0See “AirPlay function” (v p. 127) on how to play a music file saved on
an iPhone, iPod touch, iPad or iTunes on this unit via the network.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
81
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Listening to music on an iPod
1Connect the iPod to the USB port. (v p. 69)
2Press iPod/USB to switch the input source to “iPod/
USB”.
“Browse from iPod” is displayed on the display of this unit.
0Nothing is displayed on the TV screen.
3Operate iPod itself while seeing the iPod screen to play
back music.
0“iPod Browse Mode” has two modes, “From iPod” and “On-Screen”. By default,
“From iPod”, where you operate the iPod itself while looking at the iPod screen, is
set.
0To change to “On-Screen”, where you perform operations while having the iPod
information displayed on the TV screen, see “iPod Browse Mode settings”
(v p. 83).
NOTE
0Depending on the type of iPod and the software version, some functions may not
operate.
0Note that Marantz will accept no responsibility whatsoever for any problems
arising with the data on an iPod when using this unit in conjunction with the iPod.
oOperations accessible through the option
menu
This can be operated when the “iPod Browse Mode” (v p. 83) is
set to “From iPod”.
0“iPod Browse Mode settings” (v p. 83)
0“Adjusting the audibility of dialog and vocals (Dialog
Enhancer)” (v p. 136)
0“Adjusting the volume of each channel to match the input source
(Channel Level Adjust)” (v p. 137)
0“Adjusting the tone (Tone)” (v p. 138)
0“Displaying your desired video during audio playback (Video
Select)” (v p. 139)
0“Adjusting the picture quality for your viewing environment (Picture
Mode)” (v p. 140)
0“Playing the same music in all zones (All Zone Stereo)” (v p. 141)
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
82
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

iPod Browse Mode settings
In this mode, various lists and screens during playback on the iPod are
displayed on the TV screen.
This section describes the steps up to playing back tracks on the iPod in
“On-Screen”.
1Press OPTION when the input source is “iPod/USB”.
The option menu screen is displayed.
2Select “iPod Browse Mode”, then press ENTER.
The “iPod Browse Mode” screen is displayed.
3Use o p to select “On-Screen”, then press ENTER.
0Operations available for “On-Screen” and “From iPod” are listed
below.
iPod Browse Mode From iPod On-Screen
Playable
files
Music file P P
Video file z
Active
buttons
Remote control
unit (This unit) P P
iPod P
zOnly the sound is played.
4Use ui p to select the file to be played, then press
ENTER.
Playback starts.
Operation buttons Function
1Playback
3Pause
2Stop
8 9Skip to previous track / Skip to next track
6 7(Press and hold) Fast-reverse / Fast-forward
ENTER Playback / Pause
(Press and hold) Stop
u iSkip to previous track / Skip to next track
(Press and hold) Fast-reverse / Fast-forward
CH/PAGE d fSwitch to the previous page/next page in the list
display
HOME Go to Home screen
0The actions of the operation buttons may differ.
0The display switches between track title, artist name, and album title etc. each time
the main unit’s STATUS is pressed during playback with “iPod Browse Mode” set
to “On-Screen”.
0English letters, numbers and certain symbols are displayed. Incompatible
characters are displayed as “.” (period).
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
83
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oOperations accessible through the option
menu
This can be operated when the “iPod Browse Mode” is set to “On-
Screen”. (v p. 83)
0“iPod Browse Mode settings” (v p. 83)
0“Performing repeat playback” (v p. 85)
0“Performing random playback” (v p. 85)
0“Adjusting the audibility of dialog and vocals (Dialog
Enhancer)” (v p. 136)
0“Adjusting the volume of each channel to match the input source
(Channel Level Adjust)” (v p. 137)
0“Adjusting the tone (Tone)” (v p. 138)
0“Displaying your desired video during audio playback (Video
Select)” (v p. 139)
0“Playing the same music in all zones (All Zone Stereo)” (v p. 141)
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
84
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Performing repeat playback
1Press OPTION with “iPod Browse Mode” set to “On-
Screen”.
The option menu screen is displayed.
2Use ui to select “Repeat”, then press ENTER.
3Use o p to select repeat playback mode.
Off
(Default) : Repeat playback mode is canceled.
One: A file being played is played
repeatedly.
All: All files in the folder currently being
played are played repeatedly.
4Press ENTER.
The display returns to the playback screen.
“Repeat” settings are stored for each input source.
Performing random playback
1Press OPTION with “iPod Browse Mode” set to “On-
Screen”.
The option menu screen is displayed.
2Use ui to select “Random”, then press ENTER.
3Use o p to select random playback mode.
Off
(Default):Disable random playback.
On: Randomly play back all tracks in the
current playback folder.
4Press ENTER.
The display returns to the playback screen.
0During random playback, each time playback of a track is completed, another
track is randomly selected for playback from tracks in the folder. Therefore, it’s
possible that you may hear a track played back more than once during random
playback.
0“Random” settings are stored for each input source.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
85
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Playing a USB memory device
.
iPod/USB
OPTION
uip
ENTER
BACK
HOME
CH/PAGE df
1
8 9
6 7
3
2
0Playing back music or viewing still picture (JPEG) files stored on a USB
memory device.
0Only USB memory devices conforming to mass storage class standards
can be played on this unit.
0This unit is compatible with USB memory devices in “FAT16” or
“FAT32” format.
0The audio/video format types and specifications supported by this unit
for playback are as follows.
See “Playback a USB memory device” for details. (v p. 305)
0WMA
0MP3
0WAV
0MPEG-4 AAC
0FLAC
0ALAC
0AIFF
0DSD
0JPEG
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
86
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Playing files stored on USB memory
devices
1Connect the USB memory device to the USB port.
(v p. 69)
2Press iPod/USB to switch the input source to “iPod/
USB”.
.
Folder1
Folder2
Folder3
Music1
Music2
Music3
Music4
OPTION
OPTION
USB [1/9]
Option
3Use ui p to select the file to be played, then press
ENTER.
Playback starts.
Operation buttons Function
1Playback
3Pause
2Stop
8 9Skip to previous track / Skip to next track
6 7(Press and hold) Fast-reverse / Fast-forward
ENTER Playback / Pause
(Press and hold) Stop
u iSkip to previous track / Skip to next track
(Press and hold) Fast-reverse / Fast-forward
CH/PAGE d fSwitch to the previous page/next page in the list
display
HOME Go to Home screen
0
When an MP3 music file includes album art data, the album art can be displayed while
playing the file.
0This unit plays back picture (JPEG) files in the order in which they are stored in the
folder.
NOTE
Note that Marantz will accept no responsibility whatsoever for any problems arising with
the data on a USB memory device when using this unit in conjunction with the USB
memory device.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
87
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oOperations accessible through the option
menu
0“Performing repeat playback” (v p. 132)
0“Performing random playback” (v p. 132)
0“Searching content with keywords (Text Search)” (v p. 134)
0“Playing back music and a favorite picture at the same time
(Slideshow)” (v p. 135)
0“Setting the Slideshow Interval” (v p. 136)
0“Adjusting the audibility of dialog and vocals (Dialog
Enhancer)” (v p. 136)
0“Adjusting the volume of each channel to match the input source
(Channel Level Adjust)” (v p. 137)
0“Adjusting the tone (Tone)” (v p. 138)
0“Displaying your desired video during audio playback (Video
Select)” (v p. 139)
0“Adjusting the picture quality for your viewing environment (Picture
Mode)” (v p. 140)
0“Playing the same music in all zones (All Zone Stereo)” (v p. 141)
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
88
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Listening to music on a Bluetooth device
.
Bluetooth
BACK
ui
ENTER
1
8 9
6 7
3
2
OPTION
Music files stored on Bluetooth devices such as smartphones, digital
music players, etc. can be enjoyed on this unit by pairing and connecting
this unit with the Bluetooth device.
Communication is possible up to a range of about 32.8 ft/10 m.
NOTE
To play back music from a Bluetooth device, the Bluetooth device needs to support
the A2DP profile.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
89
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Pairing with a Bluetooth device
In order to enjoy music from a Bluetooth device on this unit, the Bluetooth
device must first be paired with this unit.
Once the Bluetooth device has been paired, it does not need to be paired
again.
1Prepare for playback.
AConnect the supplied external antennas for Bluetooth/wireless
connectivity to the Bluetooth/wireless LAN antenna connectors
on the rear panel. (v p. 25)
BPress POWER X to turn on power to the unit.
2Press Bluetooth to switch the input source to
“Bluetooth”.
.
OPTION
OPTION
Bluetooth
Music
Device
Now Playing
Artist
Album
Option
When using for the first time, the unit will go into the pairing mode
automatically and “Pairing...” will appear on the display of the unit.
3Select this unit when its name appears in the list of
devices displayed on the screen of the Bluetooth
device.
At the end of the pairing, the device name appears on the display of
this unit.
0Connect to the Bluetooth device while “Pairing” is being displayed
on the display of the unit.
Perform the connection with the Bluetooth device close to the unit
(about 3.3 ft/1 m).
0When connecting a second Bluetooth device, press and hold Bluetooth for
approximately 3 seconds or select “Pairing Mode” from the options menu to pair
the device. (v p. 93)
0This unit can be paired with a maximum of 8 Bluetooth devices. When a 9th
Bluetooth device is paired, it will be registered in place of the oldest registered
device.
0When a number appears on the display of this unit, check that it is the same
number as that shown on the screen of the Bluetooth device and then select “Pair”
for both the Bluetooth device and the unit.
0Enter “0000” when the password is requested on the screen of the Bluetooth
device.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
90
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Playing a Bluetooth device
Check the following before you play back music.
0The Bluetooth function of the Bluetooth device must be turned on
0Pairing must be completed
1Press Bluetooth to switch the input source to
“Bluetooth”.
The unit will automatically connect to the most recently used
Bluetooth device.
2Start playing the Bluetooth device.
0The Bluetooth device can also be operated with the remote
control of this unit.
Operation buttons Function
1Playback
3Pause
2Stop
8 9Skip to previous track / Skip to next track
6 7(Press and hold) Fast-reverse / Fast-forward
ENTER Playback / Pause
(Press and hold) Stop
u iSkip to previous track / Skip to next track
(Press and hold) Fast-reverse / Fast-forward
0When the power of this unit is turned on, the input source will be automatically
switched to “Bluetooth” if a Bluetooth device is connected.
0When the “IP Control” setting of this unit is set to “Always On” and a Bluetooth
device is connected with the unit in the standby state, the power of the unit will be
turned on automatically. (v p. 251)
0Press STATUS on this unit during playback to switch the display between Title
name, Artist name, Album name, etc.
0English letters, numbers and certain symbols are displayed. Incompatible
characters are displayed as “.” (period).
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
91
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

NOTE
0To operate the Bluetooth device with the remote control of this unit, the Bluetooth
device needs to support the AVRCP profile.
0The remote control of this unit is not guaranteed to work with all Bluetooth devices.
0Depending on the type of Bluetooth device, this unit outputs audio that is coupled
to the volume setting on the Bluetooth device.
oOperations accessible through the option
menu
0“Pairing with the Pairing Mode” (v p. 93)
0“Performing repeat playback” (v p. 132)
0“Performing random playback” (v p. 132)
0“Adjusting the audibility of dialog and vocals (Dialog
Enhancer)” (v p. 136)
0“Adjusting the volume of each channel to match the input source
(Channel Level Adjust)” (v p. 137)
0“Adjusting the tone (Tone)” (v p. 138)
0“Displaying your desired video during audio playback (Video
Select)” (v p. 139)
0“Playing the same music in all zones (All Zone Stereo)” (v p. 141)
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
92
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Pairing with the Pairing Mode
Pair a Bluetooth device with this unit.
1Press OPTION when the input source is “Bluetooth”.
The option menu screen is displayed.
2Use ui to select “Pairing Mode”, then press ENTER.
The device will go into the pairing mode.
3Select this unit when its name appears in the list of
devices displayed on the screen of the Bluetooth
device.
At the end of the pairing, the device name appears on the display of
this unit.
0When a number appears on the display of this unit, check that it is the same
number as that shown on the screen of the Bluetooth device and then select “Pair”
for both the Bluetooth device and the unit.
0Enter “0000” when the password is requested on the screen of the Bluetooth
device.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
93
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Listening to an HD Radio™ stations
.
TUNE +, –
TUNER
OPTION
uio p
ENTER
BACK
CH/PAGE df
0 – 9
0HD Radio stations offer higher sound quality than conventional FM/AM
broadcasts. It is also possible to receive data services and select
broadcasts from among up to eight multicast programs.
0HD Radio Technology provides higher quality sound than conventional
broadcasts and allows reception of data services.
.
Digital, CD-quality sound. HD Radio Technology enables local radio
stations to broadcast a clean digital signal. AM sounds like today’s FM and
FM sounds like a CD.
.
Program Service Data: Contributes to the superior user experience of HD
Radio Technology. Presents song name, artist, station IDs, and other
relevant data streams.
.
Adjacent to traditional main stations are extra local FM channels. These
HD2/HD3 Channels provide new, original music as well as deep cuts into
traditional genre.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
94
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

.
0HD Radio Technology manufactured under license from iBiquity Digital
Corporation. U.S. and Foreign Patents. HD Radio™ and the HD, HD
Radio, and “Arc” logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiquity Digital
Corp.
For detailed information on HD Radio Technology, please go to
“www.hdradio.com/”
0For antenna connections, see “Connecting an HD radio
receiver” (v p. 71).
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
95
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Listening to an HD Radio broadcast
1Connect the antenna. “Connecting an HD radio
receiver” (v p. 71)
2Press TUNER to switch the input source to “HD Radio”.
G TV screen H
.
TUNE+/-
TUNE+/-
STEREO
HD-AUTO
CH /
CH /
OPTION
OPTION
HD Radio
CH 1
FM 92.10MHz
Now Playing
Tune Preset Option
G Display of this unit H
.
3Press OPTION.
The option menu screen is displayed.
4Use ui to select “FM/AM”, then press ENTER.
This displays the reception band input screen.
5Use o p to select “FM” or “AM”, then press ENTER.
FM: When listening to an FM broadcast.
AM: When listening to an AM broadcast.
6Press TUNE + or TUNE - to select the station you want
listen to.
Scanning is performed until it finds an available radio station. When
it finds a radio station, it stops the scan automatically and tunes in.
The modes for receiving FM broadcasts consists of “Auto” mode that automatically
searches available broadcast stations and “Manual” mode that lets you tune in using
buttons to change the frequency. The default setting is “Auto”. You can also use
“Direct Tune” to tune in by entering the frequency directly.
In “Auto” mode, you cannot tune in to radio stations if the reception is not good.
If this is the case, then use the “Manual” mode or “Direct Tune” mode to tune in.
Operation buttons Function
TUNE +, – Selects the radio station (up/down)
CH/PAGE d fSelects preset radio stations
0 – 9 Preset channel selection /
Direct frequency tuning
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
96
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oOperations accessible through the option
menu
0“Tuning in by entering the frequency (Direct Tune)” (v p. 98)
0“Changing the tune mode (Tune Mode)” (v p. 98)
0“Tuning in to stations and presetting them automatically (Auto Preset
Memory)” (v p. 99)
0“Presetting the current broadcast station (Preset
Memory)” (v p. 100)
0“Specify a name for the preset broadcast station (Preset
Name)” (v p. 101)
0“Skipping preset broadcast stations (Preset Skip)” (v p. 102)
0“Adjusting the audibility of dialog and vocals (Dialog
Enhancer)” (v p. 136)
0“Adjusting the volume of each channel to match the input source
(Channel Level Adjust)” (v p. 137)
0“Adjusting the tone (Tone)” (v p. 138)
0“Displaying your desired video during audio playback (Video
Select)” (v p. 139)
0“Playing the same music in all zones (All Zone Stereo)” (v p. 141)
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
97
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Tuning in by entering the frequency
(Direct Tune)
You can enter the receiving frequency directly to tune in.
1Press OPTION when the input source is “HD Radio”.
The option menu screen is displayed.
2Use ui to select “Direct Tune”, then press ENTER.
The screen that lets you enter the frequency is displayed.
3Use ui or 0 – 9 to select a number and press p.
0If o is pressed, the immediately preceding input is cancelled.
4Repeat step 3 and enter the frequency of the radio
station you want to hear.
5When setting is completed, press ENTER.
The preset frequency is tuned in.
Changing the tune mode (Tune Mode)
You can change the mode for tuning into FM and AM broadcasts. If you
cannot tune in automatically with “Auto” mode, change the mode to
“Manual” and tune in manually.
1Press OPTION when the input source is “HD Radio”.
The option menu screen is displayed.
2Use ui to select “Tune Mode”, then press ENTER.
3Use o p to select the tune mode, then press ENTER.
Auto: Automatically search for and tune to a receivable
radio station.
HD-Auto : Automatically tune to the HD Radio station.
Analog-Auto : Automatically tune to an analog station and analog
HD Radio station.
Manual: Manually change the frequency one step at a time
each time the button is pressed.
Analog-
Manual :
Manually tune to an analog station and analog HD
Radio station.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
98
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Selecting an audio program
1Select the tuning mode (“HD-Auto”, “Auto” or
“Manual”).
2Press TUNE + or TUNE – to tune in the desired
Multicast channel.
0If the station you are tuning in has multiple audio programs,
“HD1”is indicated on the display.
If it only has one audio program, “HD” is indicated.
0When the unit receives multicast channels, the multicast program
number (HD2) is displayed to the right of the station name.
0This function is not available for AM HD Radio stations because they cannot
broadcast multicast channels.
0If digital audio data cannot be received after the station is selected, or if the station
signal is weak, the unit may not be able to receive the multicast channels.
0If the station signal is weak, the digital audio of the multicast channel may cut out.
Tuning in to stations and presetting
them automatically (Auto Preset
Memory)
A maximum of 56 radio stations can be automatically preset.
1Press OPTION when the input source is “HD Radio”.
The option menu screen is displayed.
2Use ui to select “Auto Preset Memory”, then press
ENTER.
3Press ENTER.
The unit starts to tune in to radio stations automatically and preset
them.
0When presetting is completed, “Completed” is displayed for about
5 seconds and the option menu screen turns off.
The preset memory is overwritten.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
99
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Presetting the current broadcast
station (Preset Memory)
Your favorite broadcast stations can be preset so that you can tune them
in easily.
Up to 56 stations can be preset.
1Tune in the broadcast station you want to preset.
(“Listening to an HD Radio broadcast” (v p. 96))
2Press OPTION.
The option menu screen is displayed.
3Use ui to select “Preset Memory”, then press ENTER.
The list of already preset channels is displayed.
4Use ui or 0 – 9 to select the channel you want to
preset, then press ENTER.
The current broadcast station that is preset.
0To preset other stations, repeat steps 1 to 4.
Channel Default settings
1 – 8 92.10 / 92.30 / 92.50 / 92.70 / 93.10 / 93.50 / 93.70 / 94.10
MHz
9 – 16 94.30 / 94.50 / 94.70 / 94.90 / 95.10 / 95.30 / 95.50 / 95.70
MHz
17 – 24 98.10 / 98.30 / 98.50 / 98.70 / 98.90 / 99.10 / 100.10 /
100.30 MHz
25 – 32 100.50 / 100.70 / 100.90 / 101.10 / 101.30 / 101.50 /
101.70 / 101.90 MHz
33 – 40 103.10 / 103.30 / 103.50 / 103.70 / 103.90 / 104.10 /
104.30 / 104.50 MHz
41 – 48 104.70 / 104.90 / 105.10 / 105.30 / 105.50 / 105.70 /
105.90 / 106.10 MHz
49 – 56 106.30 / 106.50 / 106.70 / 106.90 / 107.10 / 107.30 /
107.50 / 107.90 MHz
Listening to preset stations
1Use CH/PAGE df or 0 – 9 to select the desired preset
channel.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
100
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Specify a name for the preset
broadcast station (Preset Name)
You can set the name to the preset broadcast station or change it.
Up to eight characters can be input.
1Press OPTION when the input source is “HD Radio”.
The option menu screen is displayed.
2Use ui to select “Preset Name”, then press ENTER.
The Preset Name screen is displayed.
3Use o p to select the group of the broadcast station
you want to name.
4Use ui to select the broadcast station you want to
name, then press ENTER.
5Use ui to select a name label, then press ENTER.
The screen that lets you edit the Preset Name is displayed.
0If you select “Set Defaults”, then the unit returns to displaying the
frequency.
6Enter the characters, then press “OK”.
0For character input, see “Using the keyboard
screen” (v p. 180).
7Press OPTION to return to the previous screen.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
101
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Skipping preset broadcast stations
(Preset Skip)
Perform auto preset memory to save all the broadcasting stations that can
be received in the memory. Selecting a broadcast station becomes easier
by skipping unnecessary memories.
1Press OPTION when the input source is “HD Radio”.
The option menu screen is displayed.
2Use ui to select “Preset Skip”, then press ENTER.
The “Preset Skip” screen is displayed.
3nTo set the stations you want to skip by groups
AUse o p to select the group of broadcast stations you want to
skip.
BPress u to select “Set No.z – z to Skip”, then press ENTER.
Skip all the broadcast stations that are included in the
selected group “z-z”.
(z is the selected group number.)
nTo set the stations you want to skip by
stations
AUse o p to select the group of broadcast stations you want
to skip.
BUse ui to select the broadcast station you want to skip.
CUse o p to select “Skip”.
The station you selected is not displayed.
4Press OPTION to return to the previous screen.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
102
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Cancelling Preset Skip
1Use o p to select a group containing a broadcast
station to cancel the skip for while the “Preset Skip ”
screen is displayed.
2Use ui to select a broadcast station to cancel the skip
for.
3Use o p to select “On”.
The skip is cancelled.
NOTE
Preset skip cannot be cancelled for groups.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
103
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Checking the HD Radio reception
information
1Press STATUS on the main unit while an HD Radio
broadcast is being received.
The current reception information is shown on the display.
.
1. Normal
$
2. Frequency / Signal strength
$
3. Long Station name / Program and Program type
$
4. Title name / Artist name
$
5. Album name / Genre name
If the station signal weakens while receiving a digital broadcast (while “HD” and text
is displayed), the mode automatically switches to the analog reception mode (the
reception frequency is displayed).
Because of this, the “HD” and text may flicker if the station signal level is weak and
unstable.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
104
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Listening to Internet Radio
.
INTERNET
RADIO
ONLINE
MUSIC
OPTION
1
2
uio p
ENTER
BACK
HOME
CH/PAGE df
0Internet Radio refers to radio broadcasts distributed over the Internet.
Internet Radio stations from around the world can be received.
0The Internet radio station list on this unit the database service provided
by vTuner radio station.
0The audio format types and specifications supported by this unit for
playback are as follows.
See “Playing an Internet Radio Station” (v p. 308) for details.
0WMA
0MP3
0MPEG-4 AAC
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
105
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Listening to Internet Radio
1Prepare for playback.
0Check the network environment, then turn on this unit’s power.
(“Connecting to a home network (LAN)” (v p. 73))
2Press ONLINE MUSIC.
0You can also press INTERNET RADIO to select the input source
“Internet Radio” directly.
3Use uio p to select “Internet Radio”, then press
ENTER.
.
Favorites Internet Radio
Media Server
Online Music
4Use ui to select the search method for the radio
station that you wish to playback and then press
ENTER.
Name of country: Select the various regions.
Displays typical Internet Radio stations.
Search Stations : Displays all Internet Radio stations that
this unit can tune in to.
Search Podcasts : Displays Internet Radio stations in the
podcasts that this unit can tune in to.
Recommended
Stations :
Displays recommended Internet Radio
stations.
radiomarantz.com :
Displays Internet Radio stations added to
favorites in vTuner. For instructions on
how to add to favorites in vTuner, see
“Using vTuner to add Internet Radio
stations to favorites” (v p. 108).
Recently Played :
Displays recently played Internet Radio
stations. Up to 20 stations can be stored
in “Recently Played”.
Search by Keyword :
Displays Internet Radio stations
searched by keyword. For character
input, see “Using the keyboard
screen” (v p. 180).
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
106
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

5Use ui p to select the station, then press ENTER.
Playback starts once buffering reaches “100%”.
Operation buttons Function
1Playback
2Stop
ENTER (Press and hold) Stop
CH/PAGE d fSwitch to the previous page/next page in the list
display
HOME Go to Home screen
0The display switches between track title and radio station name etc. each time the
main unit’s STATUS is pressed.
0Any characters that cannot be displayed are replaced with “.” (period).
NOTE
The radio station database service may be suspended or be otherwise unavailable
without notice.
Playing the last played Internet Radio
station
1Press INTERNET RADIO.
The source switches to “Internet Radio” and the last played radio
station plays.
oOperations accessible through the option
menu
0“Searching content with keywords (Text Search)” (v p. 134)
0“Playing back music and a favorite picture at the same time
(Slideshow)” (v p. 135)
0“Adjusting the audibility of dialog and vocals (Dialog
Enhancer)” (v p. 136)
0“Adjusting the volume of each channel to match the input source
(Channel Level Adjust)” (v p. 137)
0“Adjusting the tone (Tone)” (v p. 138)
0“Displaying your desired video during audio playback (Video
Select)” (v p. 139)
0“Playing the same music in all zones (All Zone Stereo)” (v p. 141)
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
107
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Using vTuner to add Internet Radio
stations to favorites
There are many Internet Radio stations in the world, and this unit can tune
into these stations. But finding the radio station you want to hear may be
difficult, because there are too many stations. If this is the case, then
please use vTuner, an Internet Radio station search website specifically
designed for this unit. You can use your PC to search Internet Radio
stations and add them as your favorites. This unit can play radio stations
added to vTuner.
1Check the MAC address of this unit.
(“Information” (v p. 247))
0The MAC address is necessary when you create an account for
vTuner.
2Use your PC to access the vTuner website (http://
www.radiomarantz.com).
3Enter the MAC address of this unit, then click “Go”.
4Enter your E-mail address and a password of your
choice.
5Select the search criteria (genre, region, language,
etc.) of your choice.
0You can also enter a keyword to search for a station you want to
hear.
6Select the radio station of your choice from the list, and
then click the Add to Favorites icon.
7Enter the name of the favorite group, then click “Go”.
A new favorite group that includes the selected radio station is
created.
0Internet Radio stations added to favorites in vTuner can be played
from “radiomarantz.com” (v p. 106) with this unit.
You can also add a radio station that is not in the vTuner list.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
108
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Playing back files stored on a PC and NAS
.
OPTION
ONLINE
MUSIC
uio p
ENTER
BACK
HOME
CH/PAGE df
1
8 9
6 7
3
2
0This unit can play back music files and playlists (m3u, wpl) stored on a
PC and on Network Attached Storage (NAS) that supports DLNA.
0The network audio playback function of this unit connects to the server
using technologies shown below.
Windows Media Player Network Sharing Service
0The audio/video format types and specifications supported by this unit
for playback are as follows.
For details, see “Playing back a file saved on a PC or
NAS” (v p. 307).
0WMA
0MP3
0WAV
0MPEG-4 AAC
0FLAC
0ALAC
0AIFF
0DSD
0JPEG
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
109
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Applying media sharing settings
Here, we apply the settings to share music files stored on a PC and NAS on the network.
If you are using a Media Server, be sure to apply this setting first.
.
oWhen using Windows Media Player 12
(Windows 7 / Windows 8)
1Start up Windows Media Player 12 on the PC.
2Select “More streaming options...” in the “Stream”.
3Select “Allowed” in the “Marantz SR7009” drop-down
list.
4Select “Allowed” in the drop-down list for “Media
programs on this PC and remote connections...”.
5Follow the screen instructions to end the setting.
oWhen using Windows Media Player 11
1Start up Windows Media Player 11 on the PC.
2Select “Media Sharing” in the “Library”.
3Click the “Share my media” check box, select “Marantz
SR7009”, and then click “Allow”.
4As you did in step 3, select the icon of the device (other
PCs and mobile devices) you want to use as a media
controller, and then click “Allow”.
5Click “OK” to finish.
oSharing media stored in NAS
Change settings on the NAS to allow this unit and other devices (PCs
and mobile devices) used as media controllers to access the NAS. For
details, see the owner’s manual that came with the NAS.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
110
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Playing back files stored on a PC and
NAS
Use this procedure to play music files, image files or playlists.
1Prepare for playback.
ACheck the network environment, then turn on this unit’s power.
(“Connecting to a home network (LAN)” (v p. 73))
BPrepare the computer. (vComputer’s operating instructions)
2Press ONLINE MUSIC.
3Use uio p to select “Media Server”, then press
ENTER.
.
Favorites Internet Radio
Online Music
Media Server
4Use ui to select the server including the file to be
played, then press ENTER.
5Use iu p to select the file, then press ENTER.
Playback starts once buffering reaches “100%”.
Operation buttons Function
1Playback
3Pause
2Stop
8 9Skip to previous track / Skip to next track
6 7(Press and hold) Fast-reverse / Fast-forward
ENTER Playback / Pause
(Press and hold) Stop
u iSkip to previous track / Skip to next track
(Press and hold) Fast-reverse / Fast-forward
CH/PAGE d fSwitch to the previous page/next page in the list
display
HOME Go to Home screen
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
111
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

0The display switches between track title, artist name, and album title each time the
main unit’s STATUS is pressed.
0When a WMA (Windows Media Audio), MP3 or MPEG-4 AAC file includes album
art data, the album art can be displayed while the music files are playing.
0If you use Ver.11 or later of Windows Media Player, the album art for WMA files
can be displayed.
0WMA Lossless files can be played when using a server supporting transcoding,
such as Windows Media Player (Ver.11 or later).
0This unit plays back picture (JPEG) files in the order in which they are stored in the
folder.
NOTE
0When playing back music files with your PC or NAS connected through wireless
LAN, audio may be interrupted depending on your wireless LAN environment. In
this case, connect using a wired LAN.
0Depending on the size of the still picture (JPEG) file, some time may be required
for the file to be displayed.
0The order in which the tracks/files are displayed depends on the server
specifications. If the tracks/files are not displayed in alphabetical order due to the
server specifications, searching by the first letter may not work properly.
oOperations accessible through the option
menu
0“Performing repeat playback” (v p. 132)
0“Performing random playback” (v p. 132)
0“Searching content with keywords (Text Search)” (v p. 134)
0“Playing back music and a favorite picture at the same time
(Slideshow)” (v p. 135)
0“Setting the Slideshow Interval” (v p. 136)
0“Adjusting the audibility of dialog and vocals (Dialog
Enhancer)” (v p. 136)
0“Adjusting the volume of each channel to match the input source
(Channel Level Adjust)” (v p. 137)
0“Adjusting the tone (Tone)” (v p. 138)
0“Displaying your desired video during audio playback (Video
Select)” (v p. 139)
0“Adjusting the picture quality for your viewing environment (Picture
Mode)” (v p. 140)
0“Playing the same music in all zones (All Zone Stereo)” (v p. 141)
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
112
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Viewing photographs on the Flickr site
.
OPTION
2
ONLINE
MUSIC
uio p
ENTER
BACK
HOME
CH/PAGE df
0Flickr is an online photo sharing service. You can use this unit to view
photographs that have been made public by Flickr users. You do not
need an account to use Flickr.
To view photographs that you recorded yourself, you need an account
in order to upload these photographs to the Flickr server.
For details, see the Flickr homepage.
http://www.flickr.com/
0You can view photographs shared by particular users, or all of the
photographs shared on Flickr.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
113
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Viewing photographs shared by
particular users
1Prepare for playback.
0Check the network environment, then turn on this unit’s power.
(“Connecting to a home network (LAN)” (v p. 73))
2Press ONLINE MUSIC.
3Use uio p to select “Flickr”, then press ENTER.
.
Favorites Internet Radio
Media Server
Online Music
4Use ui to select “Add Flickr Contact”, then press
ENTER.
5Enter the screen name that you wish to add to
“Contact” (Screen Name: User name you wish to view).
0For character input, see “Using the keyboard
screen” (v p. 180).
6After inputting the “Contact”, press “OK”.
The screen name is added to “Contact”, and the screen name you
entered in step 5 is displayed on the top screen of Flickr.
0If you enter a screen name that does not exist, “The Flickr Contact
you entered could not be found” is displayed. Check and enter
the correct screen name.
7Use ui to select the screen name added to “Contact”,
then press ENTER.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
114
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

8Use ui to select the folder, then press ENTER.
Favorites : Displays the favorite photographs of the
specified user.
Photostream : Displays a list of shared photographs.
PhotoSets : Displays the folder (photograph album) list.
Contacts : Displays the screen name used by the
specified user in Contacts.
Remove this
Contact : Deletes a user from Flickr Contact.
Add this Contact : Adds a user from Flickr Contact.
9Use ui p to select the photograph, then press ENTER.
The selected photograph is displayed.
Operation buttons Function
ENTER Playback
2Stop
ENTER Playback
(Press and hold) Stop
u iDisplay previous photograph / Display next
photograph
CH/PAGE d fSwitch to the previous page/next page in the list
display
HOME Go to Home screen
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
115
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Viewing all photographs on Flickr
1Use ui to select “All Content”, then press ENTER.
2Use ui to select the folder, and then press ENTER.
Interestingness :
Displays photographs that are popular from the
number of user comments or number of times
they are added as favorites.
Recent : Displays the most recently added photographs.
Search by text : Search for photographs by keyword.
3Use ui p to select the photograph, then press ENTER.
The selected photograph is displayed.
NOTE
Depending on the file format, some photographs may not be viewable.
oOperations accessible through the option
menu
0“Setting the Slideshow Interval” (v p. 136)
0“Adjusting the picture quality for your viewing environment (Picture
Mode)” (v p. 140)
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
116
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Listening to Pandora®
.
OPTION
1
9
3
2
ONLINE
MUSIC
uio p
ENTER
BACK
HOME
CH/PAGE df
Pandora is an automated music recommendation and Internet Radio
service created by the Music Genome Project.
To listen to Pandora you will need a free Pandora account.
If you do not have a Pandora account, you can create one at
www.pandora.com or from the Pandora smartphone application.
Playback of Pandora in this unit requires the Pandora account to be linked
to the unit. Therefore, access http://www.pandora.com/marantz from your
personal computer and perform the linkage.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
117
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Listening to Pandora®
1Prepare for playback.
0Check the network environment, then turn on this unit’s power.
(“Connecting to a home network (LAN)” (v p. 73))
2Press ONLINE MUSIC.
3Use uio p to select “Pandora”, then press ENTER.
.
Online Music
Favorites Internet Radio
Media Server
4If you have a Pandora account, use ui to select “I
have a Pandora account”, then press ENTER.
0If you do not have a Pandora account, to select “I am to new to
Pandora”. The URL of Pandora and activation code are
displayed. Access the Pandora web page from your PC and
register the displayed activation code and account information.
Then press ENTER.
.
BACK
BACK
Pandora
I have a Pandora account
Please go to
http://www.pandora.com/marantz and follow
the instructions there to create a new account.
Your activation code is : zzzzzz
I am to new to Pandora
Cancel Continue
This is an identification code required to
register your purchased product to the
Pandora service.This code is used to
obtain your account.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
118
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

5Input “Email address” and “Password”.
0For character input, see “Using the keyboard
screen” (v p. 180).
0Press BACK to cancel the input. When “Cancel input?” is
displayed, select “Yes”, then press ENTER.
6After inputting the “Email address” and “Password”,
select “OK”, then press ENTER.
If the “Email address” and “Password” match, the top menu for
Pandora is displayed.
.
OPTION
OPTION
My Station [1/4]
Option
New Station
Shuffle
Music1 Radio
Sign Out
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
119
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Creating a new station
You can create up to 100 radio stations.
1Use ui to select “New Station”, then press ENTER.
2Input a track or artist name, then press “OK”.
0For character input, see “Using the keyboard
screen” (v p. 180).
3Use ui to select “Search by Artist” or “Search by
Track”, then press ENTER.
You can search and display a list by track or artist.
4Use ui, select a file from the list, press ENTER.
New station is created.
Your new station will play music with similar qualities to the artist or track you
entered.
Operation buttons Function
1Playback
3Pause
2Stop
9Skip to next track
ENTER Playback / Pause
(Press and hold) Stop
iSkip to next track
CH/PAGE d fSwitch to the previous page/next page in the list
display
HOME Go to Home screen
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
120
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Listening to an existing station
1Use ui and select the radio station that you want to
listen to, then press ENTER.
You can skip up to 6 tracks that are being played back within 1 hour.
Listening to created radio stations at
random
1Use ui to select “Shuffle”, then press ENTER.
Created radio stations are selected at random, and tracks are
streamed.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
121
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Giving feedback and managing
stations
You can personalize your stations by providing feedback.
1Press p while a track is playing.
The Pandora menu screen is displayed.
I like this track :
Press when you like the track that is being
played.
Playback a favorite track.
Display the E (Thumbs up) icon.
I don’t like this
track :
Press when you don’t like the track that is
being played.
Delete that track from the radio station.
Display the D (Thumbs down) icon.
Why is this track
playing? :
Displays the reason why Pandora selected
this track.
Create station : Creates a station for the track or artist being
played.
Bookmark this
track :
Bookmarks the artist currently being played.
You can check on a computer or iPhone etc.
For details, see the Pandora web page.
I’m tired of this
track :
Press when you don’t like the track that is being
played.
The track will not be played for 1 month.
Delete this
station :
Press when you want to delete the station that
is being played.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
122
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Sign Out
Disassociate this unit from your Pandora account.
1Use ui to select “Sign Out”, then press ENTER.
2When the popup menu appears, use o p to select
“Yes”, then press ENTER.
oOperations accessible through the option
menu
0“Adjusting the audibility of dialog and vocals (Dialog
Enhancer)” (v p. 136)
0“Adjusting the volume of each channel to match the input source
(Channel Level Adjust)” (v p. 137)
0“Adjusting the tone (Tone)” (v p. 138)
0“Displaying your desired video during audio playback (Video
Select)” (v p. 139)
0“Adjusting the picture quality for your viewing environment (Picture
Mode)” (v p. 140)
0“Playing the same music in all zones (All Zone Stereo)” (v p. 141)
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
123
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Listening to SiriusXM Internet Radio
.
OPTION
1
2
ONLINE
MUSIC
uio p
ENTER
BACK
HOME
CH/PAGE df
You can access SiriusXM to enjoy access to a wide range of unique
content.
An All Access package lets you listen to SiriusXM on your computer,
smartphone, tablet or Lynx Portable.
For details, see the SiriusXM homepage.
http://www.siriusxm.com
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
124
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Listening to SiriusXM Internet Radio
Over 155 channels commercial-free music, plus play-by-play sports,
exclusive talk, comedy and entertainment.
1Prepare for playback.
ACheck the network environment, then turn on this unit’s power.
(“Connecting to a home network (LAN)” (v p. 73))
BAccess the following website from your PC and obtain a SiriusXM
account.
http://www.siriusxm.com
0If you already have SiriusXM Internet Radio credentials, select
Sign in in step 4 and enter your SiriusXM username and
password. If you need to setup a SiriusXM account or Internet
Radio credentials, visit www.siriusxm.com/care
2Press ONLINE MUSIC.
3Use uio p to select “SiriusXM”, then press ENTER.
.
Online Music
Favorites Internet Radio
Media Server
4Select “Sign in” and then press ENTER.
5Input “Username” and “Password”.
0For character input, see “Using the keyboard
screen” (v p. 180).
6Select the “Sign in”, then press ENTER.
The top menu of SiriusXM is displayed.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
125
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

7Use ui to select the genre, then press ENTER.
8Use ui to select the file, then press ENTER.
The selected file is displayed.
Operation buttons Function
1Playback
2Stop
ENTER Playback
(Press and hold) Stop
CH/PAGE d fSwitch to the previous page/next page in the list
display
HOME Go to Home screen
Sign Out
Disassociate this unit from your SiriusXM account.
1Use ui to select “Sign Out”, then press ENTER.
2When the popup menu appears, use o p to select
“Yes”, then press ENTER.
oOperations accessible through the option
menu
0“Adjusting the audibility of dialog and vocals (Dialog
Enhancer)” (v p. 136)
0“Adjusting the volume of each channel to match the input source
(Channel Level Adjust)” (v p. 137)
0“Adjusting the tone (Tone)” (v p. 138)
0“Displaying your desired video during audio playback (Video
Select)” (v p. 139)
0“Adjusting the picture quality for your viewing environment (Picture
Mode)” (v p. 140)
0“Playing the same music in all zones (All Zone Stereo)” (v p. 141)
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
126
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

AirPlay function
Music files stored on your iPhone, iPod touch, iPad or iTunes can be
played on this unit via the network.
0X is displayed on the menu screen while AirPlay is being operated.
0Source input will be switched to “Online Music” when AirPlay playback is started.
0You can stop AirPlay playback by pressing o or choosing other input source.
0To see song and artist names together, press STATUS on the main unit.
0For information about how to use iTunes, also see the Help for iTunes.
0The screen may differ depending on the OS and software versions.
.
This unit
Router
PC
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
127
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Playing songs from your iPhone, iPod
touch or iPad
If you update your “iPhone/iPod touch/iPad” to iOS 4.2.1 or later, you can
stream music stored in your “iPhone/iPod touch/iPad” directly to this unit.
1Connect your iPhone, iPod touch or iPad Wi-Fi to the
same network as this unit.
0For details, see your device’s manual.
2Play the song on your iPhone, iPod touch or iPad.
' is displayed on the iPhone, iPod touch or iPad screen.
3Tap the AirPlay icon '.
.
AirPlay
AirPlay
AirDrop
AirDrop
4Select the speaker (devices) you want to use.
Playing iTunes music with this unit
1Install iTunes 10, or later, on a Mac or Windows PC that
is connected to the same network as this unit.
2Turn this unit ON.
Set “IP Control” to “Always On” for this unit. (v p. 251)
NOTE
When “IP Control” is set to “Always On”, the unit consumes more standby
power.
3Start iTunes and click the AirPlay icon ' to select the
main unit.
.
4Choose a song and click play in iTunes.
The music will stream to this unit.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
128
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Selecting multiple speakers (devices)
It is possible to play iTunes songs on your home’s AirPlay compatible
speakers (devices) other than those of this unit.
1Click the AirPlay icon ' and select “Multiple”.
2Check the speakers you want to use.
NOTE
In playback using the AirPlay function, the sound is output at the iPhone, iPod touch,
iPad or iTunes volume setting level.
You should turn down the iPhone, iPod touch, iPad or iTunes volume prior to
playback and then adjust it to a suitable level.
Perform iTunes playback operations
with the remote control unit of this unit
With this unit’s remote control unit, you can perform iTunes song play,
pause, and auto search (cue) operations.
1Select the “Edit” - “Preferences...” in the iTunes menu.
2Select “Devices” in the iTunes setting window.
3Check “Allow iTunes audio control from remote
speakers”, and then click “OK”.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
129
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Spotify Connect function
Spotify is the world’s most popular streaming service. If you subscribe to
Spotify Premium, you can control your new speaker with your phone or
tablet. Because Spotify is built-in to your speaker, you can still take calls or
use other apps - the music never stops.
To try Spotify Premium free for 30 days, or learn more about Connect,
please go to www.spotify.com/connect.
.
Spotify server
Control
This unit
Spotify App
Audio streaming/control
Playing Spotify music with this unit
Download the “Spotify App” onto your Android or iOS device beforehand.
To play a Spotify track in this unit, you need to register in the Spotify
premium account first.
1Connect the Wi-Fi settings of the iOS or Android device
in the same network as this unit.
2Launch the Spotify App.
3Play back the Spotify track.
4Tap the F icon to select the unit.
.
4:440:13
The music will stream to this unit.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
130
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Performing repeat playback
nSupported input sources :
USB / Media Server / Bluetooth
1While content is playing, press OPTION.
The option menu screen is displayed.
2Use ui to select “Repeat”, then press ENTER.
3Use o p to select repeat playback mode.
Off
(Default):Repeat playback mode is canceled.
One: A file being played is played
repeatedly.
All: All files in the folder currently being
played are played repeatedly.
4Press ENTER.
The display returns to the playback screen.
0This cannot be set up if the Bluetooth device does not support the repeat setting
under the AVRCP profile.
0“Repeat” settings are stored for each input source.
Performing random playback
nSupported input sources :
USB / Media Server / Bluetooth
1While content is playing, press OPTION.
The option menu screen is displayed.
2Use ui to select “Random”, then press ENTER.
3Use o p to select random playback mode.
Off
(Default):Disable random playback.
On: Randomly play back all tracks in the
current playback folder.
4Press ENTER.
The display returns to the playback screen.
0During random playback, each time playback of a track is completed, another
track is randomly selected for playback from tracks in the folder. Therefore, it’s
possible that you may hear a track played back more than once during random
playback.
0This cannot be set up if the Bluetooth device does not support the random setting
under the AVRCP profile.
0“Random” settings are stored for each input source.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
132
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Registering to Favorites
You can register a total of 100 favorites.
nSupported input sources : Internet Radio /
Media Server / Pandora / SiriusXM
1While content is playing, press OPTION.
The option menu screen is displayed.
2Use ui to select “Save to Favorites”, then press
ENTER.
“Favorite added” is displayed, and the current content is added to
favorites.
0The display returns to the playback screen when the procedure is
completed.
Playing back content added to the
“Save to Favorites”
1Press ONLINE MUSIC.
2Use uio p to select “Favorites”, then press ENTER.
.
Internet Radio
Media Server
Online Music
Favorites
3Use ui to select the content you want to play, then
press ENTER.
Playback starts.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
133
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Deleting content added to favorites
1Press ONLINE MUSIC.
2Use uio p to select “Favorites”, then press ENTER.
3Use ui to select the content you want to delete from
favorites, then press OPTION.
The option menu screen is displayed.
4Use ui to select “Remove from Favorites”, then press
ENTER.
“Favorite removed” is displayed, and the selected content is deleted
from favorites.
0The screen returns to the previous screen when the delete
process is complete.
Searching content with keywords (Text
Search)
nSupported input sources :
USB / Internet Radio / Media Server
1While the content is playing, press OPTION.
The option menu screen is displayed.
2Use ui to select “Text Search”, then press ENTER.
The keyboard input screen is displayed.
3Enter the first character of the Internet Radio station or
file you want to search for, and then press “OK”.
0For character input, see “Using the keyboard
screen” (v p. 180).
4Use ui to select the content you want to play, then
press ENTER.
Playback starts.
“Text Search” searches for Internet Radio stations or files that start with the entered
first character from the displayed list.
NOTE
Text Search may not work for some lists.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
134
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Playing back music and a favorite picture at the same time (Slideshow)
nSupported input sources : USB
1Play back a still picture.
0Playing back still pictures stored on USB memory devices.
(v p. 87)
2Play back a music file. (v p. 87)
3Press OPTION.
The option menu screen is displayed.
4Use ui to select “Slideshow”, then press ENTER.
The option menu disappears, and the picture you were viewing is
shown on the screen.
nSupported input sources :
Internet Radio / Media Server
1Play back a still picture.
0Play back still pictures stored on Media Server. (v p. 109)
0Play back still pictures stored on Flickr. (v p. 113)
2Play back a music file of Media Server or Internet Radio
station. (v p. 105, 109)
3Press OPTION.
The option menu screen is displayed.
4Use ui to select “Slideshow”, then press ENTER.
The option menu disappears, and the picture you were viewing is
shown on the screen.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
135
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Setting the Slideshow Interval
Set the playback interval when playing back a slideshow of still picture
(JPEG) files stored on a USB memory device or media server, or on the
Flickr website.
nSupported input sources :
USB / Media Server / Flickr
1While the list is displayed, press OPTION.
The option menu screen is displayed.
2Use ui to select “Slideshow Interval”, then press
ENTER.
3Use o p to set the display time.
Off: The slide show is not played back.
5s - 60s
(Default: 5s):
Set the time for displaying a single picture when
playing back images in the slide show.
4Press ENTER.
The “Slideshow Interval” settings are reflected for all input sources.
Adjusting the audibility of dialog and
vocals (Dialog Enhancer)
This function adjusts the center channel frequency band to enhance the
dialog in the movies and vocals in music for easier listening.
1Press OPTION.
2Use ui to select “Dialog Enhancer”, then press
ENTER.
3Use o p to select your favorite enhancement effect.
Off
(Default):
Does not enhance the dialog or
vocals.
Low / Medium / High: Enhances the dialog and vocals.
4Press ENTER.
“Dialog Enhancer” settings are stored for each source.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
136
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Adjusting the volume of each channel
to match the input source (Channel
Level Adjust)
The volume of each channel can be changed while listening to music. You
can set this for each input source.
1Press OPTION.
The option menu screen is displayed.
2Use ui to select “Channel Level Adjust”, then press
ENTER.
The channel level adjust screen is displayed.
3Use ui to select the channel that you wish to adjust.
4Use o p to adjust the volume.
–12.0 dB – +12.0 dB (Default : 0.0 dB)
0Select “Reset” and press ENTER if you want to restore the adjustment values of
the various channels to “0.0 dB” (default).
0Headphone volume can be adjusted when a headphone is connected.
0“Channel Level Adjust” settings are stored for each input source.
0You can only set this for speakers that output audio. In addition, you cannot set
this when in the menu “HDMI Audio Out” is set to “TV”. (v p. 196)
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
137
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Adjusting the tone (Tone)
Adjusts the tonal quality of the sound.
1Press OPTION.
The option menu screen is displayed.
2Use ui to select “Tone”, then press ENTER.
The Tone screen is displayed.
3Use o p to set the tone control function to on/off.
On: Allow tone adjustment (bass, treble).
Off
(Default):Playback without tone adjustment.
4Select “On” in step 3 and press i to select the sound
range to be adjusted.
Bass: Adjust bass.
Treble: Adjust treble.
5Use o p to adjust the tone, then press ENTER.
-6 dB – +6 dB (Default : 0 dB)
0“Tone” settings are stored for each input source.
0This cannot be set when the sound mode is set to “Direct” or “Pure Direct”.
0This item cannot be set when “Dynamic EQ” is set to “On”. (v p. 188)
0You cannot set this when no audio signal is input or in the menu “HDMI Audio Out”
is set to “TV”. (v p. 196)
0This cannot be set when the input mode is set to “7.1CH IN”.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
138
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Displaying your desired video during
audio playback (Video Select)
This unit can display video from a different source on TV during audio
playback. You can set this for each input source.
nSupported input sources:
iPod/USB / CDz / HD Radio / Online Music /
Bluetooth / Phono
zThis cannot be set when any of the HDMI, component video or video
connectors are assigned.
1Press OPTION during audio playback.
The option menu screen is displayed.
2Use ui to select “Video Select”, then press ENTER.
3Use o p to select the Video Select mode.
Off
(Default):Disable Video Select mode.
On: Enable Video Select mode.
4If you selected “On” in step 3, press i and select
“Source”.
5Use o p to select the input source for video you want
to play back, then press ENTER.
“Video Select” settings are stored for each input source.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
139
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Adjusting the picture quality for your
viewing environment (Picture Mode)
nSupported input sources :
CBL/SAT / DVD / Blu-ray / Game / AUX1 /
AUX2 / Media Player / iPod/USB /
Online Music / CDz / TV Audioz
zYou can set the picture mode when an HDMI, component video or video
connector is assigned.
1Press OPTION during video playback.
The option menu screen is displayed.
2Use ui to select “Picture Mode”, then press ENTER.
3Use o p to select picture mode.
Off: No picture quality adjustment is done with this unit.
Standard: The standard mode suited for most living room
viewing environments.
Movie: A mode suited for watching movies in a dark room
such as a theater room.
Vivid: A mode that makes graphic images for games, etc.
brighter and more vivid.
Streaming: A mode suited for low bit rate video sources.
ISF Day: A mode suited for watching movies in a bright room
during the day.
ISF Night: A mode suited for watching movies in a dark room at
night.
Custom: Adjusts the picture quality manually.
4Press ENTER.
“Picture Mode” settings are stored for each input source.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
140
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Playing the same music in all zones (All
Zone Stereo)
You can play back the music being played back in MAIN ZONE
simultaneously in ZONE2 and ZONE3 (other rooms).
It is useful when you want to enjoy the same music at the same time in
multiple rooms during home party or when you want to play back the same
BGM in the entire house.
1Press OPTION.
The option menu screen is displayed.
2Use ui to select “All Zone Stereo”, then press ENTER.
3Select “Start”, then press ENTER.
0The input sources for ZONE2 and ZONE3 are switched to the
same input source as for MAIN ZONE, and playback starts in the
All Zone Stereo mode.
0When you do not want ZONE2 or ZONE3 to participate in All
Zone Stereo, press ENTER to clear the check mark and then
press “Start”.
oStopping the All Zone Stereo mode
1During playback in All Zone Stereo mode, press
OPTION.
The option menu screen is displayed.
2Use ui to select “All Zone Stereo”, then press ENTER.
3Select “Stop”, then press ENTER.
0The All Zone Stereo mode is canceled even when the power supply of the MAIN
ZONE is turned off.
0In the All Zone Stereo mode, only the “Multi Ch Stereo” and “Stereo” sound modes
can be selected.
0When “HDMI Audio Out” is set to “TV”, the All Zone Stereo mode is not available.
(v p. 196)
0When “Input Mode” is set to other than “7.1CH IN”, the All Zone Stereo mode is
available. (v p. 209)
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
141
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Selecting a sound mode
.
PUREMOVIE
MUSIC GAME
ui
This unit allows you to enjoy various kinds of surround and stereo
playback modes.
Disc formats such as Blu-ray Disc and DVD, as well as being supported by
digital broadcasting, and even by streaming movies and music from
internet-based subscription services.
This unit supports playback of almost all of these multi-channel audio
formats. It also supports surround playback of audio formats other than
multi-channel audio such as 2-channel stereo audio.
For audio formats recorded on a disc, see the disc jacket or label.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
142
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Selecting a sound mode
1Press MOVIE, MUSIC or GAME to select a sound mode.
MOVIE : Switches to the sound mode suitable for enjoying movies
and TV programs.
MUSIC : Switches to the sound mode suitable for enjoying music.
GAME : Switches to the sound mode suitable for enjoying games.
0The MOVIE, MUSIC, or GAME button memorizes the last sound mode selected for
its button. Pressing MOVIE, MUSIC, or GAME recalls the same sound mode as
the one selected at the previous playback.
0If the content played back does not support the previously selected sound mode,
the most appropriate sound mode for the content is automatically selected.
0This can also be set by pressing MOVIE, MUSIC or GAME on the main unit.
oSwitching the sound mode
0Press MOVIE, MUSIC or GAME to display a list of the sound modes
that can be selected. Each time you press MOVIE, MUSIC or GAME,
the sound mode changes.
0While the list is displayed, you can also use ui to select a sound
mode.
0Try out various sound modes and enjoy sound mode in your favorite
mode.
GExampleH When MOVIE is pressed
.
MOVIE SOUND
Stereo
Dolby Surround
DTS Neo:X Cinema
Multi Ch Stereo
Virtual
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
143
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Direct playback
Sound recorded in source is played as is.
1Press PURE to select “Direct”.
Direct playback begins.
0While DSD signals are played back, “DSD Direct” is displayed.
0This can also be set by pressing PURE DIRECT on the main unit.
Pure Direct playback
This mode is for playback with higher sound quality than in Direct playback
mode.
This mode turns off the main unit display and analog video circuit. Doing
so suppresses noise sources that affect sound quality.
1Press PURE to select “Pure Direct”.
The display goes dark, and Pure Direct playback begins.
The PURE DIRECT indicator lights.
0In Direct and Pure Direct sound modes, the following items cannot be adjusted.
0Tone (v p. 138)
0M-DAX (v p. 185)
0MultEQ® XT32 (v p. 187)
0Dynamic EQ (v p. 188)
0Dynamic Volume (v p. 189)
0Graphic EQ (v p. 191)
0This can also be set by pressing PURE DIRECT on the main unit.
NOTE
0Video signals are only output when HDMI signals are played in the Pure Direct
mode.
0When the Pure Direct mode has been selected, the display turns off after about 5
seconds.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
144
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Auto surround playback
This mode detects the type of input digital signal, and automatically
selects the corresponding mode for playback.
Perform stereo playback when the input signal is PCM. When the input
signal is Dolby Digital or DTS, the music is played back according to the
respective channel number.
1Press PURE to select “Auto”.
Auto surround playback begins.
This can also be set by pressing PURE DIRECT on the main unit.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
145
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oDescription of sound mode types
Dolby sound mode
Sound mode type Description
Dolby Surround This mode uses Dolby Surround Upmixer to extend various sources to natural and realistic multi channels for playback.
Use ceiling speakers such as top middle speakers to realize a three-dimensional sound field.
Dolby Digital This mode can be selected when playing sources recorded in Dolby Digital.
Dolby TrueHD This mode can be selected when playing sources recorded in Dolby TrueHD.
Dolby Digital Plus This mode can be selected when playing sources recorded in Dolby Digital Plus.
Dolby Atmos This mode can be selected when playing back content encoded with Dolby Atmos.
It decodes Dolby Atmos content and its positioning data in real time and outputs audio from the appropriate speakers,
creating natural audio images regardless of the speaker layout. Use ceiling speakers and Dolby Enabled speakers to
realize a three-dimensional sound field.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
146
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

DTS sound mode
Sound mode type Description
DTS Neo:X This matrix decoding technology uses the DTS Neo:X decoder to playback 2-channel source or 5.1/6.1/7.1-channel
surround sources as a maximum of 11.1-channel surround sound.
The “Music” mode is suitable for playing music, the “Cinema” mode is suitable for playing movies and the “Game” mode is
suitable for playing games.
DTS Surround This mode can be selected when playing sources recorded in DTS.
DTS ES Dscrt6.1zThis mode is suitable for playing discs recorded in DTS-ES.
The surround back channel added using the discrete method is played as an independent channel.
Since all channels are independent, the 360-degree spacial expressiveness and sound localization are enhanced.
DTS ES Mtrix6.1zThis mode is suitable for playing discs recorded in DTS-ES.
The surround back channel added to the surround-left and surround-right channels by a matrix encoder at software
recording time is decoded by this unit’s matrix decoder and played from each channel (surround left, surround right,
surround back).
DTS 96/24 This mode can be selected when playing sources recorded in DTS 96/24.
DTS-HD This mode can be selected when playing sources recorded in DTS-HD.
DTS Express This mode can be selected when playing sources recorded in DTS Express.
zThis can be selected when “Speaker Config.” - “Surr. Back” is not set to “None”. (v p. 237)
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
147
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

PCM multi-channel sound mode
Sound mode type Description
Multi Ch In This mode can be selected when playing multi-channel PCM/DSD sources.
Audyssey DSX® sound mode
Sound mode type Description
Audyssey DSX® (A-DSX)zThis mode creates playback for the new channels (front wide or front height) in 5.1-channel systems. By adding front wide
or front height channels, the surround sound effects sound become more three dimensional and realistic.
zThis can be selected when a setting other than “None” is selected for “Front Height” or “Front Wide”, and a setting other than “None” is selected for “Center” in “Speaker
Config.”. (v p. 236)
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
148
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Original sound mode
Sound mode type Description
Multi Ch Stereo This mode is for enjoying stereo sound from all speakers.
Stereo audio (2-channel) sources are played back via the front (L/R) speakers, the surround speakers and surround back
speakers (if connected).
Virtual This mode lets you experience an expansive surround sound effect when playing back through just the front (L/R)
speakers only, and when listening with stereo headphones.
Auto sound mode
Sound mode type Description
Auto In this mode, the type of digital signal input, such as Dolby Digital, Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus, DolbyDigital EX,
DTS, DTS-HD, DTS-ES, PCM (multi-channel) is detected, and the playback mode switches automatically to the
corresponding mode.
If the input signal is analog or PCM (2-channel), stereo playback is used. For Dolby Digital or DTS, the music is played
back according to the respective channel number.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
149
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Stereo sound mode
Sound mode type Description
Stereo This mode plays 2-channel stereo audio with no additional surround sound processing.
0Sound is output from the front left and right speakers, and subwoofer if connected.
0When multi-channel signals are inputted, they are mixed down to 2-channel audio and are played back with no
additional surround sound processing.
Direct sound mode
Sound mode type Description
Direct This mode plays back audio as recorded in the source.
Pure Direct This mode plays back an even higher quality sound than the “Direct” mode.
The following circuits are stopped in order to further improve sound quality.
0Display indicator circuit of the main body (display will go off.)
0The analog video input/output switcher and processor is disabled.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
150
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oSound mode that can be selected for each input signal
0The following sound modes can be selected using the MOVIE, MUSIC and GAME buttons.
0Adjust the sound field effect with the menu “Surround Parameter” to enjoy surround sound the way you like it. (v p. 182)
Input signal Sound mode Sound mode
MOVIE MUSIC GAME
2-channel z1
Dolby Surround S S S
DTS Neo:X Cinema z2S
DTS Neo:X Music z2S
DTS Neo:X Game z2S S
Multi Ch Stereo S S S
Virtual S S S
z12-channel also includes analog input.
z2This mode plays back 2-channel sources in 5.1, 7.1 or 9.1-channel playback. It cannot be selected when headphones are used, or when only front speakers are used.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
151
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Input signal Sound mode Sound mode
MOVIE MUSIC GAME
Multi-channel z3Stereo S S S
Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital S S S
Dolby Digital + Dolby Surround S S S
Dolby Digital A-DSX z4S S S
Dolby Digital + Neo:X Cinema S
Dolby Digital + Neo:X Music S
Dolby Digital + Neo:X Game S
Dolby TrueHD
Dolby TrueHD S S S
Dolby TrueHD + Dolby Surroundz5S S S
Dolby Atmosz6S S S
Dolby TrueHD A-DSX z4S S S
Dolby TrueHD + Neo:X Cinema S
Dolby TrueHD + Neo:X Music S
Dolby TrueHD + Neo:X Game S
z3Some sound modes cannot be selected depending on the audio format or number of channels of the input signal. For details, see “Types of input signals, and
corresponding sound modes” (v p. 314).
z4These modes add new channels to 5.1-channel surround using Audyssey DSX® processing. (v p. 190)
z5This can be selected when the input signal does not contain Dolby Atmos.
z6This can be selected when the input signal contains Dolby Atmos.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
152
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Input signal Sound mode Sound mode
MOVIE MUSIC GAME
Multi-channel z3
Dolby Digital Plus
Dolby Digital Plus S S S
Dolby Digital Plus + Dolby Surroundz5S S S
Dolby Atmosz6S S S
Dolby Digital Plus A-DSX z4S S S
Dolby Digital Plus + Neo:X Cinema S
Dolby Digital Plus + Neo:X Music S
Dolby Digital Plus + Neo:X Game S
Dolby Atmos Dolby Atmos S S S
DTS
DTS Surround S S S
DTS ES Dscrt 6.1 S S S
DTS ES Mtrx 6.1 S S S
DTS 96/24 S S S
DTS + Dolby Surround S S S
DTS Surround A-DSX z4S S S
DTS + Neo:X Cinema S
DTS + Neo:X Music S
DTS + Neo:X Game S
z3Some sound modes cannot be selected depending on the audio format or number of channels of the input signal. For details, see “Types of input signals, and
corresponding sound modes” (v p. 314).
z4These modes add new channels to 5.1-channel surround using Audyssey DSX® processing. (v p. 190)
z5This can be selected when the input signal does not contain Dolby Atmos.
z6This can be selected when the input signal contains Dolby Atmos.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
153
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Input signal Sound mode Sound mode
MOVIE MUSIC GAME
Multi-channel z3
DTS-HD /
DTS Express
DTS-HD Hi Res S S S
DTS-HD Mstr S S S
DTS-HD Mstr A-DSX z4S S S
DTS Express S S S
DTS Express A-DSX z4S S S
DTS-HD + Dolby Surround S S S
DTS-HD HI Res A-DSX z4S S
DTS-HD + Neo:X Cinema S
DTS-HD + Neo:X Music S S
DTS-HD + Neo:X Game S
PCM multi-channel
Multi Ch In S S S
Multi Ch In 7.1 S S S
Multi In + Dolby Surround S S S
Multi In A-DSX z4S S S
Multi In + Neo:X Cinema S
Multi In + Neo:X Music S
Multi In + Neo:X Game S
Multi Ch Stereo S S S
Virtual S S S
z3Some sound modes cannot be selected depending on the audio format or number of channels of the input signal. For details, see “Types of input signals, and
corresponding sound modes” (v p. 314).
z4These modes add new channels to 5.1-channel surround using Audyssey DSX® processing. (v p. 190)
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
154
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oViews on the display
.
Dolby D + S
Blu-ray
q w
AShows a decoder to be used.
0In the case of the Dolby Digital Plus decoder, “Dolby D +” is
displayed.
BShows a decoder that creates sound output.
0“k” indicates that the Dolby Surround decoder is being used.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
155
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

HDMI control function
A recent addition to the HDMI standard is CEC (Consumer Electronics Control), which allows control signals from one device to communicate with
another device via the HDMI cable connection.
Setting procedure
1Enable the HDMI control function of this unit.
Set “HDMI Control” to “On”. (v p. 197)
2Turn the power on for all the devices connected by
HDMI cable.
3Set the HDMI control function for all devices connected
by HDMI cable.
0Please consult the operating instructions for the connected
devices to check the settings.
0Carry out steps 2 and 3 should any of the devices be unplugged.
4Switch the television input to the HDMI input connected
to this unit.
5Switch the input source of this unit to check that video
from the player connected by HDMI is played back
correctly.
6When you turn the TV’s power to standby, check that
the power of this unit also goes to standby.
NOTE
0Some functions may not operate depending on the connected TV or player. Check
the owner’s manual of each device for details beforehand.
0The HDMI ZONE2 function is not compatible with the HDMI control function.
0When the HDMI ZONE2 function is used with “HDMI Control” in the menu set to
“On”, the HDMI ZONE2 function may not fully work.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
156
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Sleep timer function
.
SLEEP
ZONE SELECT
You can have the power automatically switched to standby once a set time
has elapsed. This is convenient for viewing and listening while going to
sleep. The sleep timer function can be set for each zone.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
157
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Using the sleep timer
1Press ZONE SELECT to switch “MAIN”, “ZONE2” or
“ZONE3”.
2Press SLEEP and display the time you want to set.
0The sleep timer indicator lights up on the display and the sleep
timer starts.
0You can set the sleep timer in the range from 10 to 120 minutes in
steps of 10 minutes.
oChecking the remaining time
Press SLEEP when the sleep timer is in operation.
The remaining time appears on the display.
oTo cancel the sleep timer
Press SLEEP to select “Off”.
The sleep timer indicator on the display turns off.
The sleep timer setting is canceled when the unit switches to standby mode.
NOTE
The sleep timer function cannot turn off the power of devices connected to this unit.
To turn off the power of those connected devices, set up sleep timers on the
connected devices themselves.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
158
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Smart select function
.
SMART
SELECT
1 – 4
ZONE
SELECT
Settings such as the input source, volume level and sound mode can be
registered to the SMART SELECT 1 - 4 buttons.
You can simply press one of the registered SMART SELECT buttons in
subsequent playbacks to switch to the group of saved settings in a batch.
By saving frequently used settings at the SMART SELECT 1 – 4 buttons,
you will always be able to easily call up the same playback environment.
The Smart Select function can be memorized for each zone.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
159
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Calling up the settings
1Press ZONE SELECT to switch “MAIN”, “ZONE2” or
“ZONE3”.
2Press SMART SELECT.
The Smart Select settings registered to the button you pressed are
called up.
0The default settings for the input source and volume are as shown
below.
GMAIN ZONEH
Button Input source Volume
SMART SELECT 1 CBL/SAT 40
SMART SELECT 2 Blu-ray 40
SMART SELECT 3 Media Player 40
SMART SELECT 4 Online Music 40
GZONE2H / GZONE3H
Button Input source Volume
SMART SELECT 1 CBL/SAT 40
SMART SELECT 2 Blu-ray 40
SMART SELECT 3 Media Player 40
SMART SELECT 4 Online Music 40
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
160
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Changing the settings
1Set the items below to the settings you want to
register.
The following settings from A to I can be memorized for MAIN
ZONE, and settings A and B can be memorized for ZONE2 and
ZONE3.
AInput source (v p. 79)
BVolume (v p. 80)
CSound mode (v p. 142)
DAudyssey (Audyssey MultEQ® XT32, Audyssey Dynamic EQ®,
Audyssey Dynamic Volume®, Audyssey LFC™) (v p. 187 -
189)
E“M-DAX” (v p. 185)
F“Adjusting the volume of each channel to match the input source
(Channel Level Adjust)” (v p. 137)
G“Displaying your desired video during audio playback (Video
Select)” (v p. 139)
H“Adjusting the picture quality for your viewing environment
(Picture Mode)” (v p. 140)
I“Video Output” (v p. 196)
Press and hold SMART SELECT while a radio station is being received or a
track is being played back with any of the following sources, the current radio
station or track is memorized.
0HD Radio / Internet Radio / Media Server / Pandora / SiriusXM / Favorites /
iPod/USB
2Press ZONE SELECT to switch “MAIN”, “ZONE2” or
“ZONE3”.
3Press and hold the desired SMART SELECT until
“Smartz Memory”, “Z2 Smartz Memory” or “Z3
Smartz Memory” appears on the display.
The current settings will be memorized.
z is displayed the number for the SMART SELECT button you
pressed.
oChanging the Smart Select Name
The MAIN ZONE Smart Select name displayed on the TV screen or
display of this unit can be changed to a different name.
For the name change method, see “Smart Select
Names” (v p. 258).
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
161
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Web control function
You can control this unit from a web control screen on a web browser.
.
This unit
PC
Router
Tablet
0This unit and the PC or tablet need to be connected correctly to the network in
order to use the web control function. (“Connecting to a home network
(LAN)” (v p. 73))
0Depending on the settings of your security-related software, you may not be able
to access this unit from your PC. If this is the case, then change the settings of the
security-related software.
Controlling the unit from a web control
1Switch the “IP Control” setting to “Always On”.
(v p. 251)
2Check the IP address of this unit with “Information”.
(v p. 247)
.
Network/Information
Friendly name
Connection
IP Address
MAC Address
Displays the current network settings of the AVR
Marantz SR7009
Wired (Ethernet)
DHCP On
192.168.100.19
zzzzzz
-000000
Checking the IP address.
3Start up the web browser.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
162
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

4Enter the IP address of this unit in browser’s address
box.
For example, if the IP address of this unit is “192.168.100.19”, enter
“http://192.168.100.19”.
.
http://192.168.100.19
File Edit View Tools HelpFavorites
5When the top menu is displayed, click on the menu
item you want to operate.
.
MAIN ZONE
CBL/SAT
ZONE2
Online Music
Load
SR7009
SR7009
Audio
Setup Menu
Video
Inputs
Speakers
Network
General
Save
ZONE3
CBL/SAT
0You can use the “Save” and “Load” functions to store or recall various function
settings using web control from a PC.
0To memorize settings, click “Save” on the Setup Menu screen.
0To call up settings, click “Load” on the Setup Menu screen.
0We recommend using one of the following web browsers.
Internet Explorer 10 and above
Mozilla Firefox 24 and above
Google Chrome 29 and above
Safari 5.x and above
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
163
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Panel lock function
To prevent accidental operation of this unit, you can disable operation of
the buttons on the front panel.
.
Xui ENTER
BACK
Disabling all key button operations
1Press X while you press and hold BACK and ENTER
with the unit in standby mode.
2Use u or i to select “P/V LOCK On”.
3Press ENTER to enter the setting.
All button operations except X are disabled.
Disabling all button operations except
VOLUME
1Press X while you press and hold BACK and ENTER
with the unit in standby mode.
2Use u or i to select “FP LOCK On”.
3Press ENTER to enter the setting.
All button operations except X and VOLUME are disabled.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
164
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Canceling the Panel lock function
1Press X while you press and hold BACK and ENTER
with the unit in standby mode.
2Use u or i to select “FP LOCK zOff”.
(z The currently set mode.)
3Press ENTER to enter the setting.
The Panel lock function is canceled.
Even when the Panel lock function is set, you can operate the unit using the remote
control unit.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
165
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Remote lock function
When connecting an IR receiver, enable the Remote lock function. When
the function is enabled, you can not perform operations with the remote
control unit.
By default, this function is disabled.
.
Xui ENTER
BACK
Disabling the sensor function of the
remote control unit
1Press X while you press and hold BACK and ENTER
with the unit in standby mode.
2Use u or i to select “RC LOCK On”.
3Press ENTER to enter the setting.
Enabling the remote sensor function
1Press X while you press and hold BACK and ENTER
with the unit in standby mode.
2Use u or i to select “RC LOCK zOff”.
(z The currently set mode.)
3Press ENTER to enter the setting.
Infrared light receiving function on the main unit is enabled.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
166
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Switches light illumination on/off
.
Light illumination
DIMMER
You can switch the light illumination around the main display on or off.
The default setting is “On”.
1Press and hold DIMMER on the main unit for 3
seconds.
0Carry out the same procedure if you want to change the settings
again.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
167
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Playback in ZONE2/ZONE3 (Separate room)
You can operate this unit to enjoy video and audio in a room (ZONE2 and ZONE3) that is different from the room where this unit is placed (MAIN ZONE).
You can simultaneously play back the same source in both the MAIN ZONE, ZONE2 and ZONE3. You can also play back separate sources in the MAIN
ZONE, ZONE2 and ZONE3.
Connecting ZONE
You can use the following three methods to play back video and audio in
ZONE2 and ZONE3.
0Connection through the HDMI ZONE2 connector (v p. 168)
0Connection through the video output connector and speaker output
connector (v p. 169)
0Connection through the video output connector and external power
amplifiers (v p. 171)
oConnection 1 : Connection through the HDMI
ZONE2 connector
When a TV is connected to the HDMI ZONE2 OUT connector, you can
play back a video or audio from the device connected to the HDMI 1 –
7 IN connector in ZONE2 (HDMI ZONE2 function).
.
HDMI
ZONE2 HDMI
ZONE2
MAIN ZONE
When a TV is connected to the HDMI ZONE2 OUT connector, and the MAIN ZONE
and ZONE2 are set to the same input source, the MAIN ZONE audio may be mixed
down to 2-channel audio.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
168
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oConnection 2 : Connection through the video output connector and speaker output connector
When “Assign Mode” in the menu is set to any of the following audio is output from speakers in ZONE2 or ZONE3. (v p. 221)
nAssign Mode: 7.1ch + ZONE2
.
IN
VIDEO
VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO
YP
BPR
IN
wq wwq
(L) (R)
ZONE2
or
This unit
MAIN ZONE
nAssign Mode: 7.1ch + ZONE3
.
wqwq
(L) (R)
ZONE3
This unit
MAIN ZONE
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
169
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oConnection 3 : Connection through the video output connector and external power amplifiers
The audio signals of this unit’s ZONE2 and ZONE3 audio output connectors are played on the ZONE2 and ZONE3 power amplifiers.
.
R
L
IN
VIDEO
VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO
YPBPR
IN
AUX IN
AUX IN
Power amplier
ZONE3
ZONE2
or
This unit
MAIN ZONE
Power amplier
R
L
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
171
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

0The analog audio signal and the 2-channel PCM signal input from HDMI connector or digital connectors (OPTICAL/COAXIAL) can be played back in ZONE2.
0If you want to play back HDMI signals other than 2-channel PCM in ZONE2, set “HDMI Audio” to “PCM”. (v p. 256) 2-channel PCM signals are output from a device
connected to the input source selected for ZONE2 and can be played back in ZONE2.
In this case, the MAIN ZONE audio will also be converted to 2-channel PCM signals if the MAIN ZONE and ZONE2 are set to the same input source. However, depending on
the playback device, the playback signal may not be converted to PCM even if this setting is configured.
0The analog audio signal and the 2-channel PCM signal input from digital connectors (OPTICAL/COAXIAL) can be played back in ZONE3.
0When “Component Video Out” in the menu is set to “ZONE2”, the component video output connector outputs the ZONE2 video. (v p. 203)
0The menu screen is not output in ZONE2.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
172
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Playback in ZONE2/ZONE3
.
VOLUME df
POWER X
MUTE :
ZONE SELECT
Input source
select buttons
1Press ZONE SELECT to switch “ZONE2” or “ZONE3”.
2Press POWER X to turn on the ZONE2 or ZONE3 power.
The multi zone power indicator on the display lights.
0Power in ZONE2 or ZONE3 can be turned on or off by pressing
ZONE2 ON/OFF or ZONE3 ON/OFF on the main unit.
3Press the input source select button to select the input
source to be played.
The audio signal of the selected source is output to ZONE2 or
ZONE3.
0To perform an operation with the main unit, press ZONE
SELECT. Each time you press ZONE SELECT, the input source
changes.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
173
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oAdjusting the volume
Use VOLUME df to adjust the volume.
0At time of purchase, “Volume Limit” is set to “70 (–10 dB)”.
(v p. 257)
Turn VOLUME after pressing ZONE SELECT on the main unit to adjust the
volume.
oTurning off the sound temporarily (Muting)
Press MUTE :.
The sound is reduced to the level set at “Mute Level” in the menu.
(v p. 257)
0To cancel mute, either adjust the sound volume or press MUTE :
again.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
174
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Menu map
When using menu operations, connect this unit to a TV and operate this unit while viewing the TV.
The recommended settings are configured for this unit by default. You can customize this unit based on your existing system and your preferences.
Setting items Detailed items Description Page
.
Audio
Dialog Level Adjust This setting adjusts the output level to clarify the dialogue output from the center
channel.
181
Subwoofer Level Adjust This setting adjusts the volume level for the subwoofer. 181
Surround Parameter Adjusts surround sound parameters. 182
M-DAX Expands the low and high frequency components of compressed audio content such as
MP3 files to enable richer audio playback.
185
Audio Delay Compensates for incorrect timing between video and audio. 186
Volume Sets the MAIN ZONE (room where the unit is located) volume setting. 186
Audyssey Set Audyssey MultEQ® XT32, Audyssey Dynamic EQ®, Audyssey Dynamic Volume®,
Audyssey LFCTM and Audyssey DSX®.
187
Graphic EQ Uses the graphic equalizer to adjust the tone of each speaker. 191
.
Video
Picture Adjust Adjusts picture quality. 193
HDMI Setup Makes settings for HDMI video/audio output. 195
Output Settings Makes settings for video output. 199
Component Video Out Sets whether to use the component video output connector for MAIN ZONE or ZONE2. 203
On Screen Display Configures the on-screen display settings. 204
TV Format Sets the video signal format to be output for the TV you are using. 205
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
Settings
175
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Setting items Detailed items Description Page
.
Inputs
Input Assign Changes input connector assignment. 206
Source Rename Changes the display name for input source. 208
Hide Sources Removes from the display input sources that are not used. 208
Source Level Adjusts the playback level of the audio input. 208
Input Select Sets the audio input mode and decode mode. 209
.
Speakers
Audyssey® Setup The acoustic characteristics of the connected speakers and listening room are
measured and the optimum settings are made automatically.
210
Manual Setup Sets up the speakers manually or changes the Audyssey® Setup settings. 221
.
Network
Information Displays network information. 247
Connection Selects whether to connect the home network to a wireless LAN or a wired LAN. 247
Settings Used for manually setting the IP address or when using a proxy server. 250
IP Control Enables network communication in standby power mode. 251
Friendly Name The “Friendly Name” is the name of this unit displayed on the network. You can change
the Friendly Name according to your preferences.
252
Diagnostics Used to check the network connection. 252
Maintenance Mode Used when receiving maintenance from a Marantz service engineer or custom installer.
This mode is not designed for use by the end user, and should only be used by a trained
service technician or custom installation professional.
253
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
176
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Setting items Detailed items Description Page
.
General
Language Changes the language of the display on the TV screen. 254
ECO Configures the ECO Mode and Auto Standby energy-saving functions. 254
ZONE2 Setup/
ZONE3 Setup
Makes settings for audio playback with ZONE2 and ZONE3. 256
Zone Rename Changes the display title of each zone to one you prefer. 258
Smart Select Names Changes the Smart Select Name display title to one you prefer.
Trigger Out 1/
Trigger Out 2
Select the conditions for activating trigger out function. 258
Front Display Makes settings related to the display on this unit. 259
Information Shows information about this unit settings, input signals, etc. 259
Usage Data Selects whether or not to send anonymous usage data to Marantz. 261
Firmware Checks for the latest firmware information about updates and upgrades, updates the
firmware, and sets up the notification message display.
262
Setup Lock Protects settings from inadvertent changes. 264
.
Setup Assistant
Begin Setup... Performs basic installation/connections/settings from the beginning according to the
guidance indicated on the TV screen.
Page 9 of
the separate
manual
“Quick Start
Guide”
Language Select Sets individual setting items according to the guidance displayed on the TV screen.
Speaker Setup
Speaker Calibration
Network Setup
Input Setup
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
177
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

.
uio p
ENTER SETUP
BACK
0 – 9
ZONE SELECT
Menu operations
1Press ZONE SELECT to switch “MAIN”.
2Press SETUP.
The menu is displayed on the TV screen.
3Use ui p to select the menu to be set or operated,
then press ENTER.
4Use o p to change to desired setting.
5Press ENTER to enter the setting.
0To return to the previous item, press BACK.
0Exiting the Menu, press SETUP while the menu is displayed. The
menu display disappears.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
178
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Inputting characters
On this unit, you can change the name displayed on the following screens to the names that you prefer.
0Preset Name (v p. 101)
0Text Search (v p. 134)
0Source Rename (v p. 208)
0Friendly Name (v p. 252)
0Zone Rename (v p. 258)
0Smart Select Names (v p. 258)
0Character input for the network functions
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
179
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Using the keyboard screen
1Display the screen for inputting characters.
GExampleH “Source Rename” screen
.
Inputs/Source Rename
Changes the display name for this source
CBL/SAT
A
N
0
$
B
O
1
%
C
P
2
&
D
Q
3
‘
E
R
4
(
F
S
5
)
G
T
6
*
H
U
7
+
I
V
8
,
J
W
9
;
K
X
!
<
L
Y
“
=
M
Z
#
>
CBL/SAT
Clear
Clear
Insert
Insert
Delete
Delete
a/A
a/A
Space
Space
Cancel
Cancel
O K
O K
2Use uio p to select , or ..
3Press ENTER to move the cursor to the character that
you wish to change.
0Each time ENTER is pressed, the cursor moves by one
character.
4Select a character to be input with uio p then press
ENTER.
5Repeat steps 2 - 4 to change the name.
6Use uio p to select “OK”, then press ENTER.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
180
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Audio
Make audio-related settings.
Dialog Level Adjust
This setting adjusts the output level to clarify the dialogue output from the
center channel.
oDialog Level Adjust
Set whether to adjust the dialog level or not.
On: Enables the adjustment of the dialog
level.
Off
(Default):
Disables the adjustment of the dialog
level.
oLevel
Adjusts the volume output from the center channel.
–12.0 dB – +12.0 dB (Default : 0.0 dB)
This cannot be set when the input mode is set to “7.1CH IN”.
Subwoofer Level Adjust
This setting adjusts the volume level for the subwoofer.
oSubwoofer Level Adjust
Set whether to adjust the subwoofer level.
On: Enables the adjustment of the subwoofer
level.
Off
(Default):
Disables the adjustment of the subwoofer
level.
This cannot be set when the input mode is set to “7.1CH IN”.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
181
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Surround Parameter
You can adjust the surround audio sound field effects to match your
preferences.
The items (parameters) that can be adjusted depend on the signal being
input and the currently set sound mode. For details on the adjustable
parameters, see “Sound modes and surround parameters” (v p. 311).
0Some setting items cannot be set while playback is stopped. Make the settings
during playback.
0“Surround Parameter” settings are stored for each sound mode.
oCinema EQ
Gently softens the upper treble range of movie soundtracks to reduce
possible harshness and improve clarity.
On: “Cinema EQ” is used.
Off
(Default):“Cinema EQ” is not used.
oLoudness Management
This sets whether to output as specified in “Dynamic Compression” or
output directly without compressing the dynamic range of audio
recorded in the disc.
On
(Default):
Outputs are given based on enabling the
settings made in “Dynamic Compression”
and “Dialog normalization function”
(v p. 259).
Off:
“Dynamic Compression” settings and
“Dialogue Normalization” are disabled,
and the signals on the disc are output as
is.
“Loudness Management” can be set when Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus or
Dolby TrueHD signal is input.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
182
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oDynamic Compression
Compress dynamic range (difference between loud and soft sounds).
Auto: Automatic dynamic range compression
on/off control according to source.
Low / Medium / High: These set the compression level.
Off: Dynamic range compression is always off.
0“Dynamic Compression” can be set when Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus or
Dolby TrueHD signal is input.
0The default setting is “Off”. When the input signal is the Dolby TrueHD or
Dolby Atmos source, the default setting is “Auto”.
oLow Frequency Effects
Adjust the low frequency effects level (LFE).
nWhen “Input Mode” is set other than to “7.1CH IN”
-10 dB – 0 dB (Default : 0 dB)
nWhen “Input Mode” is set to “7.1CH IN”
0 dB / +5 dB / +10 dB / +15 dB (Default: +10 dB)
For proper playback of the different sources, we recommend setting to the
values below.
0Dolby Digital sources : 0 dB
0DTS movie sources : 0 dB
0DTS music sources: -10 dB
oCenter Gain
Distributes the dialogue output from the center channel to the front left
and right channels and widens the sound image in the front.
0.0 – 1.0
0You can set this when the sound mode is set to DTS Neo:X.
0The smaller the value, the more dialogue is concentrated on the center
channel. The larger the value, the more dialogue is distributed to front left and
right channels, and the more the sound image widens in the front.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
183
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oSpeaker Select
Makes settings for the speakers outputting sound.
nWhen the sound mode is “DTS Neo:X”.
Surround Back: Sound is output from the surround back speakers.
Height: Sound is output from the front height speakers.
Wide: Sound is output from the front wide speakers.
Back/Height: Sound is output from the surround back and front
height speakers.
Back/Wide: Sound is output from the surround back and front
wide speakers.
Height/Wide: Sound is output from the front height and front wide
speakers.
This can be selected when using any of the surround back, front wide or front
height speakers.
nWhen the sound mode is the original sound mode
Floor
(Default):Plays back without height speakers.
Floor & Height: Plays back with height speakers.
Front: Plays back only with speakers in front of the
surround speaker.
oSubwoofer
Turn subwoofer output on and off.
On
(Default):The subwoofer is used.
Off: The subwoofer is not used.
You can set this when the sound mode is “Direct” or “Stereo” and in the menu
“Subwoofer Mode” is set to “LFE+Main”. (v p. 243)
oSet Defaults
The “Surround Parameter” settings are returned to the default settings.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
184
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

M-DAX
Compressed audio formats such as MP3, WMA (Windows Media Audio)
and MPEG-4 AAC reduce the amount of data by eliminating signal
components that are hard for the human ear to hear. The “M-DAX”
function generates the signals eliminated upon compression, restoring the
sound to conditions near those of the original sound before compression.
It also restores the original bass characteristics for a rich and expanded
tonal range.
oMode
High: Optimized mode for compressed sources with very weak
highs (64 kbps and under).
Medium: Apply suitable bass and treble boost for all compressed
sources (96 kbps and under).
Low: Optimized mode for compressed sources with normal highs
(96 kbps and over).
Off: Do no use “M-DAX”.
0The M-DAX indicator lights.
0This item can be set with analog signals or PCM signal (Sample Rate =
44.1/48 kHz) is input.
0This item default setting for “Online Music”, “iPod/USB” and “Bluetooth” is
“Low”. All others are set to “Off”.
0This cannot be set when the sound mode is set to “Direct” or “Pure Direct”.
0This cannot be set when the input mode is set to “7.1CH IN”.
0“M-DAX” settings are stored for each input source.
0This can also be set by pressing M-DAX on the main unit.
0This can be set by pressing M-DAX on the main unit.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
185
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Audio Delay
Compensates for incorrect timing between video and audio.
0 ms – 200 ms (Default : 0 ms)
0Audio Delay for game mode can be set when “Video Mode” is set to “Auto” or
“Game”. (v p. 199)
0This cannot be set when the input mode is set to “7.1CH IN”.
0“Audio Delay” settings are stored for each input source.
Volume
Set the MAIN ZONE (room where the unit is located) volume setting.
oScale
Set how volume is displayed.
0 - 98
(Default):Display in the range 0 (Min) to 98.
–79.5 dB – 18.0 dB: Display ---dB (Min), in the range –79.5 dB
to 18.0 dB.
“Scale” settings are reflected in all the zones.
oLimit
Make a setting for maximum volume.
60 (–20 dB) / 70 (–10 dB) / 80 (0 dB)
Off (Default)
oPower On Level
Define the volume setting that is active when the power is turned on.
Last
(Default):
Use the memorized setting from the last
session.
Mute: Always use the muting on condition when
power is turned on.
1 – 98 (–79 dB – 18 dB) : The volume is adjusted to the set level.
oMute Level
Set the amount of attenuation when muting is on.
Full
(Default):The sound is muted entirely.
–40 dB : The sound is attenuated by 40 dB down.
–20 dB : The sound is attenuated by 20 dB down.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
186
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Audyssey
Set Audyssey MultEQ® XT32, Audyssey Dynamic EQ®, Audyssey
Dynamic Volume® and Audyssey LFC™. These can be selected after
Audyssey® Setup has been performed.
For additional information on Audyssey technology, please see
“Explanation of terms” (v p. 317).
0“MultEQ® XT32”, “Dynamic EQ”, “Reference Level Offset”, “Dynamic Volume”,
“Audyssey LFC™”, “Containment Amount” and “Audyssey DSX®” settings are
stored for each input source.
0When the sound mode is in the “Direct” or “Pure Direct” mode, “MultEQ® XT32”,
“Dynamic EQ” and “Dynamic Volume” settings cannot be configured.
0This cannot be set when the input mode is set to “7.1CH IN”.
oMultEQ® XT32
MultEQ® XT32 compensates for both time and frequency
characteristics of the listening area based on Audyssey® Setup
measurement results. Selection is done from three types of
compensation curves. It is recommended that “Reference” is selected.
Reference
(Default):
Selects the default calibrated setting with
a slight roll off at high frequencies, which
is optimized for movies.
L/R Bypass:
Selects the reference setting, but
bypasses MultEQ® XT32 on the front left
and right speakers.
Flat:
Selects the calibrated setting which is
optimized for small rooms where your
listening position is closer to the
speakers.
Off : Turn “MultEQ® XT32” equalizer off.
When the headphones are used, “MultEQ® XT32” is automatically set to “Off”.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
187
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oDynamic EQ
Solves the problem of deteriorating sound quality as volume is
decreased by taking into account human perception and room
acoustics.
Works with MultEQ® XT32.
On
(Default):Use Dynamic EQ.
Off: Do not use Dynamic EQ.
0When the menu “Dynamic EQ” setting is “On”, it is not possible to do “Tone
Control” adjustment. (v p. 138)
0This can be set by pressing DYNAMIC EQ on the main unit.
oReference Level Offset
Audyssey Dynamic EQ® is referenced to the standard film mix level. It
makes adjustments to maintain the reference response and surround
envelopment when the volume is turned down from 0 dB. However,
film reference level is not always used in music or other non-film
content. Dynamic EQ Reference Level Offset provides three offsets
from the film level reference (5 dB, 10 dB, and 15 dB) that can be
selected when the mix level of the content is not within the standard.
Recommended setting levels for content are shown below.
0 dB (Film Reference)
(Default):Optimized for content such as
movies.
5 dB : Select this setting for content that has
a very wide dynamic range, such as
classical music.
10 dB :
Select this setting for jazz or other
music that has a wider dynamic
range. This setting should also be
selected for TV content as that is
usually mixed at 10 dB below film
reference.
15 dB :
Select this setting for pop/rock music
or other program material that is
mixed at very high listening levels
and has a compressed dynamic
range.
Setting is enabled when “Dynamic EQ” is “On”. (v p. 188)
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
188
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oDynamic Volume
Solves the problem of large variations in volume level between TV,
movies and other content (between quiet passages and loud
passages, etc.) by automatically adjusting to the user’s preferred
volume setting.
Heavy: Most adjustment to softest and loudest
sounds.
Medium: Medium adjustment to loudest and
softest sound.
Light: Least adjustment to loudest and softest
sounds.
Off
(Default):Do not use Dynamic Volume.
0If “Dynamic Volume” is set to “Yes” in “Audyssey® Setup”, the setting is
automatically changed to “Medium”. (v p. 210)
0This can be set by pressing DYNAMIC VOLUME on the main unit.
oAudyssey LFC™
Adjusts the low frequency band to prevent bass and vibration from
being conveyed to neighboring rooms.
On: Use “Audyssey LFC™”.
Off
(Default):Do not use “Audyssey LFC™”.
oContainment Amount
Adjusts the amount of low frequency containment. Use higher settings
if you have close neighbors.
1 – 7 (Default : 4)
This can be set when “Audyssey LFC™” in the menu is set to “On”.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
189
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oAudyssey DSX®
Provides more immersive surround sound by adding the new
channels.
Wide: Turn on Audyssey DSX® processing for front wide
channel expansion.
Height: Turn on Audyssey DSX® processing for front height
channel expansion.
Wides/Heights: Turns on Audyssey DSX® processing for front wide
and front height channel expansion.
Off
(Default):Do not set “Audyssey DSX®”.
0“Audyssey DSX®” can be set when you are using front height speakers or front
wide speakers.
0“Audyssey DSX®” is only valid when using a center speaker.
0When 2-channel signals are being played back, “Audyssey DSX®” cannot be
used.
0“Audyssey DSX®” cannot be configured if the HD Audio source being played
includes Front height and Front wide channels. In this case, the respective
channels are played back using the input signals.
0This can be set by pressing A-DSX on the main unit.
oStage Width
Adjust sound stage width when using front wide speakers.
–10 – +10 (Default : 0)
oStage Height
Adjust sound stage height when using front height speakers.
–10 – +10 (Default : 0)
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
190
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Graphic EQ
Uses the graphic equalizer to adjust the tone of each speaker.
0Speakers for which “Graphic EQ” can be set differ according to the sound mode.
0This can be set when the “MultEQ® XT32” is set to “Off”. (v p. 187)
0This cannot be set when the sound mode is set to “Direct” or “Pure Direct”.
0This cannot be set when the input mode is set to “7.1CH IN”.
oGraphic EQ
Set whether to use the graphic equalizer or not.
On: Use the graphic equalizer.
Off
(Default):Do not use the graphic equalizer.
oSpeaker Selection
Select whether to adjust tones for individual speakers or for all
speakers.
All: Adjust all speaker tones together.
Left/Right
(Default):
Adjust the left and right speaker tones
together.
Each: Adjust the tone for each speaker.
oAdjust EQ
Adjust tonal balance for each frequency band. Adjust the speaker
selected in “Speaker Selection”.
1. Select the speaker.
2. Select the adjustment frequency band.
63 Hz / 125 Hz / 250 Hz / 500 Hz / 1 kHz / 2 kHz / 4 kHz / 8 kHz /
16 kHz
3. Adjust the level.
–20.0 dB – +6.0 dB (Default : 0.0 dB)
Front Dolby, Surround Dolby and Back Dolby speakers can only be set when 63
Hz/125 Hz/250 Hz/500 Hz/1 kHz.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
191
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oCurve Copy
Copy the Flat correction curve created in the Audyssey® Setup.
“Curve Copy” is displayed after Audyssey® Setup has been performed.
oSet Defaults
The “Graphic EQ” settings are returned to the default settings.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
192
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Video
Make video-related settings.
Picture Adjust
Picture quality can be adjusted.
0Can be set when the “Video Conversion” setting is “On”. (v p. 200)
0Can be set when “HDMI”, “COMP” or “VIDEO” is assigned for each input source.
(v p. 207)
0“Contrast”, “Brightness”, “Saturation”, “Noise Reduction” and “Enhancer” can be
set when “Picture Mode” is set to “Custom”.
0“Picture Adjust” settings are stored for each input source.
0“Picture Adjust” cannot be set when 4K signals are input.
oPicture Mode
Select the desired picture mode according to the video content and
your viewing environment.
Standard: The standard mode suited for most living room viewing
environments.
Movie: A mode suited for watching movies in a dark room such
as a theater room.
Vivid: A mode that makes graphic images for games, etc.
brighter and more vivid.
Streaming: A mode suited for low bit rate video sources.
ISF Day: A mode suited for watching movies in a bright room
during the day.
ISF Night: A mode suited for watching movies in a dark room at
night.
Custom: Adjusts the picture quality manually.
Off: No picture quality adjustment is done with this unit.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
193
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

0The two special adjustment modes, ISF Day and ISF Night, should be used by
a certified technician to adjust the color calibration to match the installation
conditions.
We recommend that the settings and adjustments be carried out by an ISF-
certified technician.
0These settings can also be configured using “Picture Mode” in the option
menu. (v p. 140)
0The default settings are as follows.
0For “Online Music” and “iPod/USB” input sources: Streaming
0For input sources other than “Online Music” and “iPod/USB”: Off
oContrast
Adjust picture contrast.
-50 – +50 (Default : 0)
oBrightness
Adjust picture brightness.
-50 – +50 (Default : 0)
oSaturation
Adjust picture chroma level (color saturation).
-50 – +50 (Default : 0)
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
194
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oNoise Reduction
Reduce overall video noise.
Low / Medium / High / Off (Default : Off)
oEnhancer
Emphasize picture sharpness.
0 – +12 (Default : 0)
HDMI Setup
Make settings for HDMI video/audio output.
NOTE
When “HDMI Pass Through” and “HDMI Control” is set to “On”, it consumes more
standby power. If you are not using this unit for an extended period, it is
recommended that you unplug the power cord from the power outlet.
oAuto Lip Sync
Make automatic compensation for timing shift in audio and video
output.
On
(Default):Correct automatically.
Off: Do not correct automatically.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
195
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oHDMI Audio Out
Select HDMI audio output device.
AVR
(Default):
Play back through speakers connected to
the unit.
TV: Play back through TV connected to the
unit.
0When the HDMI control function is activated, priority is given to the TV audio
setting. (“HDMI control function” (v p. 156))
0When the power of this unit is on and “HDMI Audio Out” is set to “TV”, audio is
output as 2-channel from the HDMI OUT connector.
oVideo Output
Select the HDMI monitor connector to be used.
Auto(Dual)
(Default):
The presence of a TV connected to the
HDMI MONITOR 1 or HDMI MONITOR 2
connector is detected automatically, and
that TV connection is used.
Monitor 1: A TV connected to the HDMI MONITOR
1 connector is always used.
Monitor 2: A TV connected to the HDMI MONITOR
2 connector is always used.
0If both the HDMI MONITOR1 and HDMI MONITOR2 connectors are
connected and “Resolution” is set to “Auto”, the signals are output with a
resolution that is compatible with both TVs. When “Resolution” is not set to
“Auto”, video may not be output. In this case, set a resolution that is
compatible with both TVs. (v p. 201)
You can check which resolutions are compatible with your TV in “HDMI
Monitor 1” and “HDMI Monitor 2”. (v p. 260)
0This can be set by pressing HDMI OUT on the main unit.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
196
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oHDMI Pass Through
Selects how this unit will transmit HDMI signals to the HDMI output in
standby power mode.
On
(Default):
Transmits the selected HDMI input
through the AV receiver’s HDMI output
when this unit is in standby power mode.
Off:
No HDMI signals are transmitted through
this unit’s HDMI output in standby power
mode.
oHDMI Control
You can link operations with devices connected to HDMI and
compatible with HDMI Control.
On: Use HDMI control function.
Off
(Default):Do not use HDMI control function.
0Please consult the operating instructions for each connected device to check
the settings.
0Refer to “HDMI control function” for more information about the HDMI control
function. (v p. 156)
NOTE
If the “HDMI Control” settings have been changed, always reset the power to
connected devices after the change.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
197
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oPass Through Source
Sets the HDMI connector that inputs HDMI signals when in standby.
Last: The most recently used input source will
go into standby mode.
CBL/SAT / DVD /
Blu-ray / Game /
AUX1 / AUX2 /
Media Player / CDz
(Default : CBL/SAT):
Pass through the selected input source.
z“Pass Through Source” can be set when any of the HDMI
connectors is assigned to “CD” for the input source in the “Input
Assign” setting. (v p. 206)
“Pass Through Source” can be set when “HDMI Control” is set to “On” or “HDMI
Pass Through” is set to “On”.
oTV Audio Switching
Sets automatic switching to the “TV Audio” input when a TV connected
via HDMI sends an appropriate CEC control command to the AVR.
On
(Default):
Select the “TV Audio” input automatically
when receiving a command from the TV.
Off:
Do not select the “TV Audio” input
automatically when receiving a command
from the TV.
“TV Audio Switching” can be set when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”.
oPower Off Control
Links the power standby of this unit to external devices.
All
(Default):
If power to a connected TV is turned off
independently of the input source, power
to this unit is automatically set to standby.
Video:
With an input source being selected that
is assigned either “HDMI”, “COMP” or
“VIDEO”, when you turn the power of the
TV off, power to this unit is automatically
set to standby. (v p. 207)
Off: This unit does not link with power to a TV.
“Power Off Control” can be set when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
198
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Output Settings
Makes settings for video output.
0Can be set when “HDMI”, “COMP” or “VIDEO” (v p. 207) is assigned for each
input source.
0“Resolution”, “Progressive Mode” and “Aspect Ratio” can be set when “i/p Scaler”
is set to anything other than “Off”.
0“Output Settings” cannot be set when 4K signals are input.
0“Video Conversion”, “i/p Scaler”, “Resolution”, “Progressive Mode” and “Aspect
Ratio” settings are stored for each input source.
oVideo Mode
Configure the video processing method to match the type of video
content.
Auto
(Default):
Process video automatically based on
the HDMI content information.
Game:
Always process video for game content.
Minimize the video delay when the video
is delayed compared to the button
operations on the controller of the game
console.
Movie: Perform image processing that is suitable
for contents other than games.
If “Video Mode” is set to “Auto”, the mode is switched according to the input
contents.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
199
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oVideo Conversion
The input video signal is converted automatically in conjunction with
the connected TV. (“Video conversion function” (v p. 303))
On
(Default):The input video signal is converted.
Off: The input video signal is not converted.
oi/p Scaler
Set the video input signal to be subjected to i/p scaler processing.
i/p Scaler will convert the resolution of the input video signal to the
value set in “Resolution”. (v p. 201)
nWhen the input source is set other than to “iPod/
USB” and “Online Music”
Analog
(Default):
Use i/p (interlace-to-progressive) scaler
function for analog video signals.
Analog & HDMI: Use i/p scaler function for analog and
HDMI video signal.
HDMI: Use i/p scaler function for HDMI video
signals.
Off: Do not use i/p scaler function.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
200
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

nWhen the input source is set to “iPod/USB” and
“Online Music”
On
(Default):Use i/p scaler function.
Off: Do not use i/p scaler function.
0“Analog & HDMI” can be set for input sources for which an HDMI input
connector is assigned.
0Which items can be set depend on the input source assigned to each input
connector.
0This function is not effective when the input signal is “x.v.Color”, 3D, sYCC601
color, Adobe RGB color, Adobe YCC601 color or computer resolutions.
oResolution
Set the output resolution. You can set “Resolution” separately for
HDMI output of the analog video input and HDMI input.
Auto
(Default):
The resolution supported by the TV
connected to the HDMI MONITOR OUT
connector is detected automatically and
the appropriate output resolution is set.
480p/576p / 1080i /
720p / 1080p:24Hz / 4K /
4K(60/50) :
Set the output resolution.
0When “i/p Scaler” is set to “Analog & HDMI”, the resolution of both the analog
video input signal and HDMI input signal can be set. (v p. 200)
0When set to “1080p:24Hz”, you can enjoy film-like pictures for film sources (in
24 Hz). For video sources and mixed sources, we recommend setting the
resolution to “1080p”.
0It is not possible to convert a 50 Hz signal into 1080p/24Hz. It is output at a
resolution of 1080p/50Hz.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
201
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oProgressive Mode
Set an appropriate progressive conversion mode for the source video
signal.
Auto
(Default):
The video signal is automatically
detected and the appropriate mode is
set.
Video: Select mode suitable for video playback.
Video and Film: Select mode suitable for video and 30-
frame film material playback.
This item can be set when “i/p Scaler” is set to anything other than “Off”.
(v p. 200)
oAspect Ratio
Set the aspect ratio for the video signals output to the HDMI.
16:9
(Default):Output at 16:9 aspect ratio.
4:3 :
Output at 4:3 aspect ratio with black bars
on the sides of a 16:9 TV screen. (except
for 480p/576p output)
This item can be set when “i/p Scaler” is set to anything other than “Off”.
(v p. 200)
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
202
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Component Video Out
Set the zone to which the component video output connector is assigned.
MAIN ZONE
(Default):
Assigns the component video output connector
to MAIN ZONE.
ZONE2: Assigns the component video output connector
to ZONE2.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
203
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

On Screen Display
Select the on-screen display user interface preferences.
oVolume
Sets where to display the volume level.
Bottom
(Default):Display at the bottom.
Top: Display at the top.
Off: Turn display off.
When the master volume display is hard to see when superimposed text (closed
captioning) or movie subtitles are present, set to “Top”.
oInfo
Displays status of operation temporarily when the sound mode is
changed, or input source is switched.
On
(Default):Shows the volume display.
Off: Does not show the volume display.
oNow Playing
Sets the display time for the playback display when the input source is
“Online Music”, “iPod/USB”, “Bluetooth” or “HD Radio”.
Always On
(Default):Show display continuously.
Auto Off: Show display for 30 seconds after
operation.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
204
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

TV Format
Set the video signal format to be output for the TV you are using.
oFormat
NTSC
(Default):Select NTSC output.
PAL: Select PAL output.
“Format” can also be set by the following procedure. However, the menu screen
is not displayed. Following the display content to make the setting.
1. Press and hold the main unit’s STATUS and ZONE SELECT at the same time
for at least 3 seconds.
“Video Format <NTSC>” appears on the display.
2. Use the main unit’s o or p and set the video signal format.
3. Press the main unit’s ENTER to complete the setting.
NOTE
When a format other than the video format of the connected TV is set, the picture
will not be displayed properly.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
205
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Inputs
Perform settings related to input source playback.
You do not have to change the settings to use the unit. Make settings when needed.
Input Assign
By making connections as indicated by the input sources printed on the
audio/video input connectors of this unit, you can just press one of the
input source select buttons to easily play back audio or video from a
connected device.
Please change the assignment of the HDMI input connector, digital audio
input connector, analog audio input connector, component video input
connector and video input connector when connecting an input source
that differs from that printed to the audio/video input connectors of this
unit.
.
DIGITAL ANALOGHDMI COMP VIDEO
Inputs/Input Assign
Set Defaults
CBL/SAT
DVD
Blu-ray
Game
Media Player
TV Audio
AUX1
AUX2
1
2
3
4
5
-
Front
6
1
2
3
4
-
-
Front
-
1
2
3
-
-
-
-
-
1
2
-
3
-
-
Front
-
COAX1
COAX2
-
-
-
OPT1
-
-
Changes HDMI input assignments
CD - 5 - -
OPT2
By default, each item is set as follows.
Input source Input connector
HDMI DIGITAL ANALOG COMP VIDEO
CBL/SAT 1 COAX1 1 1 1
DVD 2 COAX2 2 2 2
Blu-ray 3 – 3 3 –
Game 4 – 4 – 3
Media Player 5 – – – –
TV Audio – OPT1 – – –
AUX1 Front – Front – Front
AUX2 6 – – – –
CD – OPT2 5 – –
nTV set top box/satellite users please note
When using the digital audio output on a TV/satellite box:
To play the video signal assigned to “HDMI” combined with the audio
signal assigned at “Input Assign” - “DIGITAL”, you will also need to
select “Digital” in the “Input Mode”. (v p. 209)
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
206
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oHDMI
Set this to change the HDMI input connectors assigned to the input
sources.
1 / 2 / 3 / 4 / 5 / 6 /
7 / Front:
Assign an HDMI input connector to the selected
input source.
– : Do not assign an HDMI input connector to the
selected input source.
When “HDMI Control” is set to “On” in the menu, “HDMI” cannot be assigned to
“TV Audio”. (v p. 197)
oDIGITAL
Set this to change the digital audio input connectors assigned to the
input sources.
COAX1 (Coaxial) /
COAX2 /
OPT1 (Optical) /
OPT2:
Assign a digital audio input connector to the
selected input source.
– : Do not assign a digital audio input connector
to the selected input source.
oANALOG
Set this to change the analog audio input connectors assigned to the
input sources.
1 / 2 / 3 / 4 / 5 /
Front: Assign a analog audio input connector to the
selected input source.
– : Do not assign a analog audio input connector to
the selected input source.
oCOMP (Component video)
Set this to change the component video input connectors assigned to
the input sources.
1 / 2 / 3: Assign the component video input connector to the selected
input source.
– : Do not assign a component video input connector to the
selected input source.
oVIDEO
Set this to change the composite video input connectors assigned to
the input sources.
1 / 2 / 3 / Front: Assign the video input connector to the selected
input source.
– : Do not assign a video input connector to the
selected input source.
oSet Defaults
The “Input Assign” settings are returned to the default settings.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
207
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Source Rename
Change the display name for input source.
This is convenient when the name of your device and the input source
name of this unit are different. You can change the name to suit your
needs. When the renaming is completed, the name is displayed on this
unit’s display and on the menu screen.
CBL/SAT / DVD / Blu-ray / Game /
AUX1 / AUX2 / Media Player / CD /
TV Audio / Phono:
Change the display name for input
source.
Set Defaults: The Source Rename settings are
returned to the default settings.
Up to 12 characters can be input. For character input, see “Using the keyboard
screen” (v p. 180).
Hide Sources
Remove from the display input sources that are not used.
Show
(Default):Use this source.
Hide: Do not use this source.
Source Level
This function corrects the playback level of the selected input source’s
audio input.
Make this setting if there are differences in the input volume levels
between the different sources.
oSource Level
nWhen the input source is set to “iPod/USB”,
“Online Music” or “HD Radio”
-12 dB – +12 dB (Default : 0 dB)
oAnalog Inputs / Digital Inputs
nWhen the input source is set other than to “iPod/
USB”, “Online Music” or “HD Radio”
-12dB – +12dB (Default : 0dB)
0The analog input level can be adjusted independently for input sources for which
“ANALOG” is assigned at “Input Assign”. (v p. 206)
0The digital input level can be adjusted independently for input sources for which
“DIGITAL” is assigned at “Input Assign”. (v p. 206)
0“Source Level” settings are stored for each input source.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
208
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Input Select
Set the audio input mode and decode mode of each input source.
The input modes available for selection may vary depending on the input
source.
“Input Select” settings are stored for each input source.
oInput Mode
Set the audio input modes for the different input sources.
It is normally recommended to set the audio input mode to “Auto”.
Auto
(Default):
Automatically detect input signal and
perform playback.
HDMI: Play only signals from HDMI input.
Digital: Play only signals from digital audio input.
Analog: Play only signals from analog audio input.
7.1CH IN: Only signals input from the 7.1CH IN
connector will be played back.
0When digital signals are properly input, the ~ indicator lights on the display.
If the ~ indicator does not light, check “Input Assign” and the connections.
(v p. 206)
0If “HDMI Control” is set to “On” and a TV compatible with the ARC is
connected via the HDMI MONITOR 1 connectors, the input mode whose input
source is “TV Audio” is fixed to ARC.
0The sound mode cannot be set if the input mode is set to “7.1CH IN”.
oDecode Mode
Set the audio decode mode for input source.
It is normally recommended to set the audio input mode to “Auto”. But
we recommend changing it to “PCM” or “DTS” if the start of the source
is clipped or noise occurs.
Auto
(Default):
Detect type of digital audio input signal
and decode and play automatically.
PCM: Decode and play only PCM input signals.
DTS: Decode and play only DTS input signals.
This item can be set for input sources for which “HDMI” or “DIGITAL” is assigned
at “Input Assign” (v p. 206).
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
209
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Speakers
The acoustic characteristics of the connected speakers and listening room are measured and the optimum settings are made automatically. This is called
“Audyssey® Setup”.
You do not have to perform Audyssey® Setup when you have already performed “Speaker Calibration” in “Setup Assistant”.
To set up the speakers manually, use “Manual Setup” on the menu. (v p. 236)
Audyssey® Setup
To perform measurement, place the Sound calibration microphone in
multiple locations all around the listening area. For best results, we
recommend you measure in six or more positions, as shown in the
illustration (up to eight positions).
When measuring the second and subsequent positions, install the Sound
calibration microphone within 2 ft (60 cm) of the first measurement position
(main listening position).
If you perform the Audyssey® setup, the Audyssey MultEQ® XT32, Audyssey
Dynamic EQ®, Audyssey Dynamic Volume® and Audyssey LFC™ functions are
enabled. (v p. 187 - 189)
.
FL SW C FR
SRSL
Surround speaker (R)
Surround speaker (L)
Subwoofer
Center speaker
Front speaker (R)
Front speaker (L)
( :Measuring positions)
Listening position
FL
FR
C
SW
SL
SR
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
210
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oAbout the main listening position
The main listening position is the position where listeners would
normally sit or where one would normally sit alone within the listening
environment. Before starting Audyssey® Setup, place the Sound
calibration microphone in the main listening position.
Audyssey MultEQ® XT32 uses the measurements from this position to
calculate speaker distance, level, polarity, and the optimum crossover
value for the subwoofer.
oAbout Audyssey Sub EQ HT™
Audyssey Sub EQ HT™ makes the integration of dual subwoofers
seamless by first compensating for any level and delay differences
between the two subwoofers and then applying Audyssey MultEQ®
XT32 to both subwoofers together.
To run Audyssey Sub EQ HT™ you must select “Measure (2 spkrs)” in
“Channel Select”. (v p. 213).
NOTE
0Make the room as quiet as possible. Background noise can disrupt the room
measurements. Close windows and turn off the power on electronic devices
(radios, air conditioners, fluorescent lights, etc.). The measurements could be
affected by the sounds emitted by such devices.
0During the measurement process, place cell phones outside the listening room.
Cell phone signals could disrupt the measurements.
0Do not stand between the speakers and Sound calibration microphone or allow
obstacles in the path while the measurements are being made. Also, install the
Sound calibration microphone at least 20 inches (50 cm) away from the wall.
Failure to do so will result in inaccurate readings.
0During the measurement process, audible test tones will come from the speakers
and subwoofer(s), but this is part of normal operation. If there is background noise
in the room, these test signals will increase in volume.
0Operating VOLUME d f on the remote control unit or VOLUME on the main unit
during the measurements will cancel the measurements.
0Measurement cannot be performed when headphones are connected. Unplug the
headphones before performing Audyssey® Setup.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
211
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Procedure for speaker settings
(Audyssey® Setup)
.
Finish
Check
Calculation & Store
Measurement
Preparation
1Attach the Sound calibration microphone to the
supplied microphone stand or own tripod and install it
at the main listening position.
When installing the Sound calibration microphone, point the tip of
the microphone toward the ceiling and adjust the height to match the
height of the ears of a listener in a seated position.
2If using a subwoofer capable of the following
adjustments, set up the subwoofer as shown below.
nWhen using a subwoofer with a direct mode
Set the direct mode to “On” and disable the volume adjustment
and crossover frequency setting.
nWhen using a subwoofer without a direct mode
Make the following settings:
0Volume : 12 o’clock position
0Crossover frequency : Maximum/Highest Frequency
0Low pass filter : Off
0Standby mode : Off
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
212
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

3Connect the Sound calibration microphone to the
SETUP MIC jack of this unit.
.
When the Sound calibration microphone is
connected, the following screen is displayed.
.
Audyssey Setup
Channel Select
Amp Assign
Check Results
Restore...
Start
Your AV receiver can automatically measure the acoustics of
your room then optimize your speakers using the included
microphone and microphone stand.
Set the following items
if necessary.
4Select “Start”, then press ENTER.
Audyssey® Setup can also make the following settings.
0Amp Assign
The signals output from the SURROUND BACK, FRONT WIDE/
HEIGHT2 and HEIGHT1 speaker terminals can be switched in
accordance with your speaker environment. (Amp
Assign (v p. 221))
0Channel Select
If channels that are not to be used are set in advance,
measurement for the set channels is skipped, and measuring
time can be reduced. You can also change the number of
surround back speakers and subwoofer.
5Follow the instructions on the screen display and press
“Next” to proceed further.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
213
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

6When the following screen is displayed, select “Begin
Test” and then press ENTER.
Start the measurement of the first position.
.
Begin Test
Back
Select “Begin Test” to start the calibration.
NOTE: You will hear a series of loud chirps starting and stopping
during the tests.
Ear Height
Audyssey Setup
0Measurement requires several minutes.
NOTE
If “Caution!” is displayed on TV screen:
0Go to “Error messages” (v p. 218). Check any related items, and
perform the necessary procedures.
0If the volume level for the subwoofer is not appropriate, an error message is
displayed. See “Subwoofer level error message and how to adjust”
(v p. 219).
7When the detected speaker is displayed, select “Next”
and then press ENTER.
.
Audyssey Setup
Repeat Last Test Next
Speaker Detection
Front
Center
Subwoofer
Surround
Surr. Back
:Yes
:Yes
:Yes
:Yes
:No
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
214
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

8Move the Sound calibration microphone to position 2,
select “Continue”, then press ENTER.
The measurement of the second position starts.
Measurements can be made in up to eight positions.
.
Complete Continue
Place the microphone ear level at the 2nd listening position,
which should be no more than 2 ft (60cm) away from the 1st
position, then select “Continue”...
Back
Ear Height
Audyssey Setup
To skip measuring the second and subsequent listening position, press o to
select “Complete” and press ENTER to proceed to step 11.
nStopping Audyssey® Setup
APress BACK to display the popup screen.
BPress o to select “Yes”, then press ENTER.
9Repeat step 8, measuring positions 3 to 8.
10
Select “Continue”, then press ENTER.
.
Audyssey Setup
Continue
Repeat Last Test
Measurements complete.
Select Continue to analyze the data...
Start the analysis and storage of the measurement results.
0Analysis takes several minutes to complete.
The more speakers and measurement positions that there are,
the more time it takes to perform the analysis.
NOTE
When the measurement results are being saved, make sure the power is not
turned off.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
215
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

11
Perform the settings for Audyssey Dynamic EQ® and
Audyssey Dynamic Volume®.
The following screen is displayed during the analysis. Configure the
settings as preferred.
.
Audyssey Setup
Audyssey Dynamic EQ maintains bass, clarity and surround
sound at low volumes letting you enjoy late-night movies
and television.
Turn on the Dynamic EQ?
Yes
No
Analyzing room data
50%
0Dynamic EQ corrects the frequency response in consideration of
the audio characteristics of the room and human hearing ability so
that sound can be heard even at low volume.
This is recommended when using the unit with the volume turned
down, e.g. when enjoying a movie or TV program in the middle of
the night.
0Dynamic Volume adjusts the output volume to the optimal level
while constantly monitoring the level of the audio input to the unit.
Optimal volume control is performed automatically without any
loss in the dynamism and clarity of the sound when, for example,
the volume suddenly increases for commercials shown during
television programs.
12
When the analysis and storage ends, unplug the Sound
calibration microphone from the SETUP MIC jack on the
main unit and then press “Next”.
.
Audyssey Setup
Now Analyzing and correcting the your room data.
Please disconnect the microphone from your AV receiver.
Next
Back
Applying room corrections
100%
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
216
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

13
Select “Details” and press ENTER to verify the
measurement results.
0Subwoofers may measure a greater reported distance than the
actual distance due to added electrical delay common in
subwoofers.
NOTE
Do not change the speaker connection or subwoofer volume after Audyssey® Setup.
If these are changed, run Audyssey® Setup again in order to configure the optimum
equalizer settings.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
217
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Error messages
An error message is displayed if Audyssey® Setup could not be completed due to speaker placement, the measurement environment, etc. If an error
message is displayed, check the relevant items and perform the necessary measures. Be sure to turn off the power before checking speaker connections.
Examples Error details Measures
No speakers found. 0Sound calibration microphone is not
detected.
0Connect the included Sound calibration microphone to the
SETUP MIC jack of this unit.
0Not all speakers could be detected. 0Check the speaker connections.
Ambient noise is too high or level is too
low
0There is too much noise in the room. 0Either turn off any device generating noise or move it away.
0Perform again when the surroundings are quieter.
0Speaker or subwoofer sound is too low. 0Check the speaker installation and the direction in which the
speakers are facing.
0Adjust the subwoofer’s volume.
Front R : None 0The displayed speaker could not be
detected.
0Check the connections of the displayed speaker.
Front R : Phase 0The displayed speaker is connected with the
polarity reversed.
0Check the polarity of the displayed speaker.
0For some speakers, this error message may be displayed
even if the speaker is properly connected. If you are sure the
connection is correct, press p to select “Ignore”, then press
ENTER.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
218
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oSubwoofer level error message and how to
adjust
The optimal level of each subwoofer channel for Audyssey® Setup
measurement is 75 dB.
During subwoofer level measurement, an error message is displayed
when one level of subwoofers is outside the 72 – 78 dB range.
When using a subwoofer with built-in amplifier (active type), adjust the
subwoofer volume so that the subwoofer level is within the 72 to 78 dB
range.
G Error message H
.
Audyssey Setup
Back SW Level MatchingSkip
Your Subwoofer 1’s level is too high.
If your subwoofer has a volume control on it,
select “SW Level Matching” to interactively adjust the level of
your subwoofer.
If your subwoofer does not have a volume control,
or if you do not want to use a subwoofer, select “Skip”.
1Select “SW Level Matching” and then press ENTER.
2Adjust the volume control on your subwoofer so that
the measured level is within the 72 to 78 dB range.
3When the measured level is within the 72 to 78 dB
range, select “Next” and then press ENTER.
0If you use two subwoofers, the second subwoofer’s adjustment
will be started. Repeat the operation from step 2, 3.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
219
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Retrieving Audyssey® Setup settings
If you set “Restore...” to “Restore”, you can return to Audyssey® Setup
measurement result (value calculated at the start by MultEQ® XT32) even
when you have changed each setting manually.
.
Audyssey Setup
Channel Select
Amp Assign
Check Results
Restore...
Start
Your AV receiver can automatically measure the acoustics of
your room then optimize your speakers using the included
microphone and microphone stand.
Set the following items
if necessary.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
220
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Manual Setup
Perform when setting the speakers manually or when changing settings
made in Audyssey® Setup.
0If you change the speaker settings after performing Audyssey® Setup,
you will no longer be able to select Audyssey MultEQ® XT32, Audyssey
Dynamic EQ® or Audyssey Dynamic Volume®. (v p. 187 - 188)
0This unit can be used without changing “Manual Setup” settings. Please
set if necessary.
Amp Assign
Select the power amplifier usage method to match your speaker system.
oAssign Mode
Select how to use the power amp.
You need to configure the detailed settings for the speaker
configuration in accordance with the selected mode. Select Assign
Mode configure the corresponding detailed settings.
11.1ch:
0Setting to use the 9-channel power amplifier in this unit
and an external power amplifier connected to PRE OUT to
play back up to 11.1 channels.
0You can connect speakers for up to 13.1 channels for
MAIN ZONE.
Speakers to output audio are automatically switched for
playing back up to 11.1-channels in accordance with the
input signal and sound mode. (v p. 224)
9.1ch:
0Settings to assign all power amplifier within this unit to
MAIN ZONE to play back up to 9.1 channels.
0You can connect speakers for up to 11.1 channels for
MAIN ZONE.
Speakers to output audio are automatically switched for
playing back up to 9.1-channels in accordance with the input
signal and sound mode. (v p. 227)
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
221
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

7.1ch +
ZONE2
(Default):
0Setting to assign the power amplifiers in this unit for
ZONE2 to 2-channels.
0You can connect speakers for up to 9.1 channels for
MAIN ZONE.
Speakers to output audio are automatically switched
for playing back up to 7.1-channels in accordance with
the input signal and sound mode. (v p. 229)
7.1ch +
ZONE3:
0Setting to assign the power amplifiers in this unit for
ZONE3 to 2-channels
0You can connect speakers for up to 9.1 channels for
MAIN ZONE.
Speakers to output audio are automatically switched
for playing back up to 7.1-channels in accordance with
the input signal and sound mode. (v p. 230)
5.1ch +
ZONE2/3:
0Setting to assign the power amplifiers within this unit
for ZONE2 and ZONE3 each to two different
channel.
7.1ch +
ZONE2/3-
MONO:
0Setting to assign the power amplifiers in this unit for
ZONE2 and ZONE3 each to a different channel.
0You can connect speakers for up to 9.1 channels for
MAIN ZONE.
Speakers to output audio are automatically switched
for playing back up to 7.1-channels in accordance with
the input signal and sound mode. (v p. 231)
7.1ch (Bi-
Amp):
0Setting to assign the power amplifiers in this unit for
front speaker bi-amp connection to 2-channels.
0You can connect speakers for up to 9.1 channels for
MAIN ZONE.
Speakers to output audio are automatically switched
for playing back up to 7.1-channels in accordance with
the input signal and sound mode. (v p. 232)
5.1ch (Bi-
Amp) +
ZONE2:
0Setting to assign the power amplifiers in this unit for
front speaker bi-amp connection to 2-channels.
0Setting to assign the power amplifiers in this unit for
ZONE2 to 2-channels.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
222
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

9.1ch/
2ch
Front:
0Setting to assign the power amplifiers in this unit for
connecting 2-channel playback speakers to 2 channels.
0You can switch the front speakers when using 2-channel
playback in direct mode or stereo mode, or when using
multi-channel surround playback. (v p. 233)
When setting speakers for 2-channel playback, also
perform the “2ch Playback” setting. (v p. 244)
7.1ch/
2ch
Front
(Bi-
Amp):
0Setting to assign the power amplifiers in this unit for the
bi-amp connection of the 2-channel playback speakers
to 4 channels.
0You can switch the front speakers when using 2-channel
playback in direct mode or stereo mode, or when using
multi-channel surround playback.
When setting speakers for 2-channel playback, also
perform the “2ch Playback” setting. (v p. 244)
7.1ch +
Front B:
0Setting to assign the power amplifiers within this unit
for connecting the second set of front speakers.
0You can switch between the desired combination of
front speakers A and front speakers B. (v p. 234)
Switch the front speaker using the “Front Speaker”
setting. (v p. 244)
Dolby
Atmos :
0Setting to assign the power amplifiers within this unit
for the speaker layout suitable for Dolby Atmos
playback. (v p. 235)
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
223
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oDetailed settings when “Assign Mode” is set to
“11.1ch”
When “Assign Mode” is set to “11.1ch”, set the following items.
nHeight Speakers
Select the number of the height speakers used in MAIN ZONE.
2 Height Speakers
(Default):Uses a set of (two) height speakers.
4 Height Speakers : Uses two sets of (four) height speakers.
Using Dolby Speakers : Uses a Dolby enabled speaker placed on
the floor.
nHeight Layout
Select the type of the height speakers used.
GWhen “Height Speakers” is set to “2 Height Speakers”H
Select the height channel used.
AUDIO OUT connectors
Select items HEIGHT1
Front Height
(Default) Front Height
Top Front Top Front
Top Middle Top Middle
Top Rear Top Rear
Rear Height Rear Height
GWhen “Height Speakers” is set to “4 Height Speakers”H
Select the height channels used for the two pair.
AUDIO OUT connectors
Select items HEIGHT1 HEIGHT2
Front Height & Top Middle Front Height Top Middle
Front Height & Top Rear Front Height Top Rear
Front Height & Rear Height Front Height Rear Height
Top Front & Top Rear
(Default) Top Front Top Rear
Top Front & Rear Height Top Front Rear Height
Top Middle & Rear Height Top Middle Rear Height
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
224
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

GWhen “Height Speakers” is set to “Using Dolby Speakers”H
Select the height channels used for the two pair.
AUDIO OUT connectors
Select items HEIGHT1 HEIGHT2
Front Dolby
(Default) Front Dolby Not assigned.
Surround Dolby Surround Dolby Not assigned.
Back Dolby Back Dolby Not assigned.
Front Dolby & Top Rear Front Dolby Top Rear
Front Dolby & Rear Height Front Dolby Rear Height
Front Height & Surr. Dolby Front Height Surround Dolby
Front Height & Back Dolby Front Height Back Dolby
Top Front & Surround Dolby Top Front Surround Dolby
Top Front & Back Dolby Top Front Back Dolby
Front Dolby & Surround Dolby Front Dolby Surround Dolby
Front Dolby & Back Dolby Front Dolby Back Dolby
nWide/Height2
Select the channel that is output from the FRONT WIDE/HEIGHT2
speaker terminals.
Front Wide
(Default):
Outputs the front wide channel from the FRONT WIDE/
HEIGHT2 speaker terminals.
Top Rearz:
Outputs the channel assigned for HEIGHT2 from the
FRONT WIDE/HEIGHT2 speaker terminals.
For the front wide channel, use the PRE OUT
connectors.
zThe displayed selection shows the channel name assigned for HEIGHT2 in the
“Height Layout” setting.
In some settings, “Wide/Height2” may not be available.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
225
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

nPre-out
Selects the PRE OUT connectors that connect the external power
amplifier used in MAIN ZONE.
GWhen “Height Speakers” is set to “2 Height Speakers”H
Front: The front left and right pre-amp outputs are connected
to an external amplifier.
Front
Heightz:
The HEIGHT1 left and right pre-amp outputs are
connected to an external amplifier.
zThe displayed selection shows the speaker name assigned for the HEIGHT1
speaker terminal in the “Height Layout” setting.
GWhen “Height Speakers” is set to “4 Height Speakers” and “Wide/
Height2” is set to “Front Wide”H
Top Rearz:The HEIGHT2 left and right pre-amp outputs are
connected to an external amplifier.
Top Front & Top
Rearz:
The HEIGHT1/HEIGHT2 left and right pre-amp
outputs are connected to an external amplifier.
Front & Top
Rearz:
The front/HEIGHT2 left and right pre-amp outputs
are connected to an external amplifier.
zThe speaker name selected using “Height Layout” is displayed.
When one set of pre-amp outputs are used, a maximum 11.1-channel audio can
be output when Dolby Atmos or Dolby Surround are played back. Furthermore,
when two sets of pre-amp outputs are used, a maximum 11.1-channel audio can
be output when Audyssey DSX® or Neo:X are played back in addition to when
Dolby Atmos or Dolby Surround are played back.
GWhen “Height Speakers” is set to “4 Height Speakers” and “Wide/
Height2” is set other than to “Front Wide”H
Front Wide: The front wide left and right pre-amp outputs are
connected to an external amplifier.
Front & Front
Wide:
The front/front wide left and right pre-amp outputs are
connected to an external amplifier.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
226
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

GWhen “Height Speakers” is set to “Using Dolby Speakers”H
Available settings differ depending on the “Height Layout” and “Wide/
Height2” settings.
Front: The front left and right pre-amp outputs are
connected to an external amplifier.
Front Dolbyz:The HEIGHT1 left and right pre-amp outputs are
connected to an external amplifier.
Surround
Dolbyz:
The HEIGHT2 left and right pre-amp outputs are
connected to an external amplifier.
Front Dolby &
Surr. Dolbyz:
The HEIGHT1/HEIGHT2 left and right pre-amp
outputs are connected to an external amplifier.
Front & Surr.
Dolbyz:
The front/HEIGHT2 left and right pre-amp outputs
are connected to an external amplifier.
Front Wide: The front wide left and right pre-amp outputs are
connected to an external amplifier.
Front & Front
Wide:
The front/front wide left and right pre-amp outputs
are connected to an external amplifier.
zThe speaker name selected using “Height Layout” is displayed.
oDetailed settings when “Assign Mode” is set to
“9.1ch”
When “Assign Mode” is set to “9.1ch”, set the following items.
nHeight Speakers
Select the number of the height speakers used in MAIN ZONE.
None: Uses no height speakers.
2 Height Speakers
(Default):Uses a set of (two) height speakers.
4 Height Speakers: Uses two sets of (four) height speakers.
Using Dolby Speakers: Uses a Dolby enabled speaker placed on
the floor.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
227
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

nHeight Layout
Select the type of the height speakers used.
This can be selected when the “Height Speakers” setting is “2 Height
Speakers”, “4 Height Speakers” or “Using Dolby Speakers”.
GWhen “Height Speakers” is set to “2 Height Speakers”H
Select the height channel used.
AUDIO OUT connectors
Select items HEIGHT1
Front Height
(Default) Front Height
Top Front Top Front
Top Middle Top Middle
Top Rear Top Rear
Rear Height Rear Height
GWhen “Height Speakers” is set to “4 Height Speakers”H
Select the height channels used for the two pairs of speakers.
AUDIO OUT connectors
Select items HEIGHT1 HEIGHT2
Front Height & Top Middle Front Height Top Middle
Front Height & Top Rear Front Height Top Rear
Front Height & Rear Height Front Height Rear Height
Top Front & Top Rear
(Default) Top Front Top Rear
Top Front & Rear Height Top Front Rear Height
Top Middle & Rear Height Top Middle Rear Height
GWhen “Height Speakers” is set to “Using Dolby Speakers”H
Select the height channels used for the two pair.
AUDIO OUT connectors
Select items HEIGHT1 HEIGHT2
Front Dolby
(Default) Front Dolby Not assigned.
Surround Dolby Surround Dolby Not assigned.
Back Dolby Back Dolby Not assigned.
Front Dolby & Top Rear Front Dolby Top Rear
Front Dolby & Rear Height Front Dolby Rear Height
Front Height & Surr. Dolby Front Height Surround Dolby
Top Front & Surround Dolby Top Front Surround Dolby
Front Dolby & Surround Dolby Front Dolby Surround Dolby
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
228
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oDetailed settings when “Assign Mode” is set to
“7.1ch + ZONE2”
When “Assign Mode” is set to “7.1ch + ZONE2”, set the following
items.
nSpeakers for ZONE2
Select speaker terminals that output audio in ZONE2.
The channels of speaker terminals selected for ZONE2 cannot be
output in MAIN ZONE.
FRONT WIDE/
HEIGHT2
(Default):
Outputs audio in ZONE2 from FRONT WIDE/
HEIGHT2 speaker terminals.
HEIGHT1: Outputs audio in ZONE2 from HEIGHT1
speaker terminals.
SURROUND BACK: Outputs audio in ZONE2 from SURROUND
BACK speaker terminals.
nHeight Layout
Select the height channel used.
This can be selected when the “Speakers for ZONE2” setting is
“FRONT WIDE/HEIGHT2” or “SURROUND BACK”.
AUDIO OUT connectors
Select items HEIGHT1
None No height channels are used.
Front Height
(Default) Front Height
Top Front Top Front
Top Middle Top Middle
Top Rear Top Rear
Rear Height Rear Height
Front Dolby Front Dolby
Surround Dolby Surround Dolby
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
229
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oDetailed settings when “Assign Mode” is set to
“7.1ch + ZONE3”
When “Assign Mode” is set to “7.1ch + ZONE3”, set the following
items.
nSpeakers for ZONE3
Select speaker terminals that output audio in ZONE3.
The channels of speaker terminals selected for ZONE3 cannot be
output in MAIN ZONE.
FRONT WIDE/
HEIGHT2
(Default):
Outputs audio in ZONE3 from FRONT WIDE/
HEIGHT2 speaker terminals.
HEIGHT1: Outputs audio in ZONE3 from HEIGHT1
speaker terminals.
SURROUND BACK: Outputs audio in ZONE3 from SURROUND
BACK speaker terminals.
nHeight Layout
Select the height channel used.
This can be selected when the “Speakers for ZONE3” setting is
“FRONT WIDE/HEIGHT2” or “SURROUND BACK”.
AUDIO OUT connectors
Select items HEIGHT1
None No height channels are used.
Front Height
(Default) Front Height
Top Front Top Front
Top Middle Top Middle
Top Rear Top Rear
Rear Height Rear Height
Front Dolby Front Dolby
Surround Dolby Surround Dolby
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
230
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oDetailed settings when “Assign Mode” is set to
“7.1ch + ZONE2/3-MONO”
When “Assign Mode” is set to “7.1ch + ZONE2/3-MONO”, set the
following items.
nSpeakers for ZONE2/3
Select speaker terminals that output audio in ZONE2 and ZONE3.
The channels of speaker terminals selected for ZONE2/ZONE3 cannot
be output in MAIN ZONE.
FRONT WIDE/
HEIGHT2
(Default):
Outputs audio in ZONE2 from the L channel of
FRONT WIDE/HEIGHT2 speaker terminals and
audio in ZONE3 from the R channel.
HEIGHT1:
Outputs audio in ZONE2 from the L channel of
HEIGHT1 speaker terminals and audio in ZONE3
from the R channel.
SURROUND
BACK:
Outputs audio in ZONE2 from the L channel of
SURROUND BACK speaker terminals and audio in
ZONE3 from the R channel.
nHeight Layout
Select the height channel used.
This can be selected when the “Speakers for ZONE2/3” setting is
“FRONT WIDE/HEIGHT2” or “SURROUND BACK”.
AUDIO OUT connectors
Select items HEIGHT1
None No height channels are used.
Front Height
(Default) Front Height
Top Front Top Front
Top Middle Top Middle
Top Rear Top Rear
Rear Height Rear Height
Front Dolby Front Dolby
Surround Dolby Surround Dolby
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
231
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oDetailed settings when “Assign Mode” is set to
“7.1ch (Bi-Amp)”
When “Assign Mode” is set to “7.1ch (Bi-Amp)”, set the following items.
nSpeakers for Bi-Amp
Select the speaker terminals used for the bi-amp connection of front
speakers.
The channels of speaker terminals selected for the bi-amp cannot be
output in MAIN ZONE.
FRONT WIDE/
HEIGHT2
(Default):
Make the bi-amp connection by using the FRONT
speaker terminals and FRONT WIDE/HEIGHT2
speaker terminals.
HEIGHT1:
Make the bi-amp connection by using the FRONT
speaker terminals and HEIGHT1 speaker
terminals.
SURROUND
BACK:
Make the bi-amp connection by using the FRONT
speaker terminals and SURROUND BACK
speaker terminals.
nHeight Layout
Select the height channel used.
This can be selected when the “Speakers for Bi-Amp” setting is
“FRONT WIDE/HEIGHT2” or “SURROUND BACK”.
AUDIO OUT connectors
Select items HEIGHT1
None No height channels are used.
Front Height
(Default) Front Height
Top Front Top Front
Top Middle Top Middle
Top Rear Top Rear
Rear Height Rear Height
Front Dolby Front Dolby
Surround Dolby Surround Dolby
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
232
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oDetailed settings when “Assign Mode” is set to
“9.1ch/2ch Front”
When “Assign Mode” is set to “9.1ch/2ch Front”, set the following
items.
nSpeakers for 2ch
Select the speaker terminals that connect the front speakers
exclusively used for 2-channel playback.
FRONT WIDE/
HEIGHT2
(Default):
Connect the front speakers exclusively used for 2-
channel playback to the “FRONT WIDE/
HEIGHT2” speaker terminals.
HEIGHT1:
Connect the front speakers exclusively used for 2-
channel playback to the HEIGHT1 speaker
terminals.
SURROUND
BACK:
Connect the front speakers exclusively used for 2-
channel playback to the SURROUND BACK
speaker terminals.
nHeight Layout
Select the height channel used.
This can be selected when the “Speakers for 2ch” setting is “FRONT
WIDE/HEIGHT2” or “SURROUND BACK”.
AUDIO OUT connectors
Select items HEIGHT1
None No height channels are used.
Front Height
(Default) Front Height
Top Front Top Front
Top Middle Top Middle
Top Rear Top Rear
Rear Height Rear Height
Front Dolby Front Dolby
Surround Dolby Surround Dolby
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
233
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oDetailed settings when “Assign Mode” is set to
“7.1ch + Front B”
When “Assign Mode” is set to “7.1ch + Front B”, set the following
items.
nSpeakers for Front B
Select the speaker terminals used for the front speakers of the second
unit.
FRONT WIDE/
HEIGHT2
(Default):
Connect the front speakers of the second unit to
the FRONT WIDE/HEIGHT2 speaker terminals.
HEIGHT1: Connect the front speakers of the second unit to
the HEIGHT1 speaker terminals.
SURROUND
BACK:
Connect the front speakers of the second unit to
the SURROUND BACK speaker terminals.
nHeight Layout
Select the height channel used.
This can be selected when the “Speakers for Front B” setting is
“FRONT WIDE/HEIGHT2” or “SURROUND BACK”.
AUDIO OUT connectors
Select items HEIGHT1
None No height channels are used.
Front Height
(Default) Front Height
Top Front Top Front
Top Middle Top Middle
Top Rear Top Rear
Rear Height Rear Height
Front Dolby Front Dolby
Surround Dolby Surround Dolby
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
234
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oDetailed settings when “Assign Mode” is set to
“Dolby Atmos”
When “Assign Mode” is set to “Dolby Atmos”, set the following items.
nLayout
Select the speaker layout for Dolby Atmos playback.
7.1ch + 4 Height:
This is a layout that adds the top front and
top rear speakers to the 7.1 channel layout
which includes the surround back channel.
Connect the top front speakers to the
HEIGHT1 speaker terminals and connect the
top rear speakers to the HEIGHT2 PRE OUT
connectors through an external power
amplifier.
7.1ch + 2 Height
(Default):
This is a layout that adds the top middle
speakers to the 7.1 channel layout including
the surround back channel. Connect the top
middle speakers to the HEIGHT1 speaker
terminals.
5.1ch + 4 Height:
This is a layout that adds the top front and
top rear speakers to the basic 5.1 channel
layout. Connect the top front speakers to the
HEIGHT1 speaker terminals and the top rear
speakers to the FRONT WIDE/HEIGHT2
speaker terminals.
5.1ch + 2 Height:
This is a layout that adds the top middle
speakers to the basic 5.1 channel layout.
Connect the top middle speakers to the
HEIGHT1 speaker terminals.
oView Terminal Config.
This shows how to connect the speaker terminals and PRE OUT
connectors for your “Amp Assign” setting on the menu screen.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
235
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Speaker Config.
Select whether or not speakers are present, playback capacity for low
bass frequencies and speaker size.
oFront
Set the front speaker size.
Large
(Default):
Use a large speaker that can adequately
play back very low bass frequencies.
Small:
Use a small speaker that has inadequate
playback capacity for very low bass
frequencies.
0When “Subwoofer” is set to “No”, “Front” is automatically set to “Large”.
0When “Front” is set to “Small”, you cannot set speakers other than “Front” to
“Large”.
oCenter
Set the presence and size of the center speaker.
Large: Use a large speaker that can adequately
play back very low bass frequencies.
Small
(Default):
Use a small speaker that has inadequate
playback capacity for very low bass
frequencies.
None: Select when a center speaker is not
connected.
oSubwoofer
Set the presence of a subwoofer.
2 spkrs: Use two subwoofers.
1 spkr
(Default):Use only one subwoofer.
None: Select when a subwoofer is not
connected.
When “Subwoofer” is set to “None” and you set “Front” to “Small”, “Subwoofer” is
automatically set to “1 spkr”.
oSurround
Set the presence and size of the surround speakers.
Large: Use a large speaker that can adequately
play back very low bass frequencies.
Small
(Default):
Use a small speaker that has inadequate
playback capacity for very low bass
frequencies.
None: Select when the surround speakers are
not connected.
When “Surround” is set to “None”, “Surr. Back”, “Front Wide”, “Surround Dolby”
and “Back Dolby” are automatically set to “None”.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
236
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oSurr. Back
Set the presence, size and number of surround back speakers.
Large: Use a large speaker that can adequately
play back very low bass frequencies.
Small
(Default):
Use a small speaker that has inadequate
playback capacity for very low bass
frequencies.
None: Select when the surround back speakers
are not connected.
2 spkrs
(Default):Use two surround back speakers.
1 spkr:
Use only one surround back speaker.
Connect to the L terminal to SURROUND
BACK when this setting is selected.
If “Surr. Back” is “None” or “1 spkr”, “Back Dolby” is automatically “None”.
oFront Wide
Set the presence and size of the front wide speakers.
Large: Use a large speaker that can adequately
play back very low bass frequencies.
Small
(Default):
Use a small speaker that has inadequate
playback capacity for very low bass
frequencies.
None: Select when the front wide speakers are
not connected.
oFront Height
Set the presence and size of the front height speakers.
Large: Use a large speaker that can adequately
play back very low bass frequencies.
Small
(Default):
Use a small speaker that has inadequate
playback capacity for very low bass
frequencies.
None: Select when the front height speakers are
not connected.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
237
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oTop Front
Set the presence and size of the top front speakers.
Large: Use a large speaker that can adequately
play back very low bass frequencies.
Small
(Default):
Use a small speaker that has inadequate
playback capacity for very low bass
frequencies.
None: Select when the top front speakers are
not connected.
oTop Middle
Set the presence and size of the top middle speakers.
Large: Use a large speaker that can adequately
play back very low bass frequencies.
Small
(Default):
Use a small speaker that has inadequate
playback capacity for very low bass
frequencies.
None: Select when the top middle speakers are
not connected.
oTop Rear
Set the presence and size of the top rear speakers.
Large: Use a large speaker that can adequately
play back very low bass frequencies.
Small
(Default):
Use a small speaker that has inadequate
playback capacity for very low bass
frequencies.
None: Select when the top rear speakers are
not connected.
oRear Height
Set the presence and size of the rear height speakers.
Large: Use a large speaker that can adequately
play back very low bass frequencies.
Small
(Default):
Use a small speaker that has inadequate
playback capacity for very low bass
frequencies.
None: Select when the rear height speakers are
not connected.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
238
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oFront Dolby
Set the presence and size of the front Dolby speakers.
Large: Use a large speaker that can adequately
play back very low bass frequencies.
Small
(Default):
Use a small speaker that has inadequate
playback capacity for very low bass
frequencies.
None: Select when the front Dolby speakers are
not connected.
oSurround Dolby
Set the presence and size of the surround Dolby speakers.
Large: Use a large speaker that can adequately
play back very low bass frequencies.
Small
(Default):
Use a small speaker that has inadequate
playback capacity for very low bass
frequencies.
None: Select when the surround Dolby
speakers are not connected.
oBack Dolby
Set the presence and size of the back Dolby speakers.
Large: Use a large speaker that can adequately
play back very low bass frequencies.
Small
(Default):
Use a small speaker that has inadequate
playback capacity for very low bass
frequencies.
None: Select when the back Dolby speakers are
not connected.
When speakers for which you assigned Height1 in “Amp Assign” are set to
“None”, “None” is automatically set for Height2.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
239
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Distances
Set distance from listening position to speakers.
Measure beforehand the distance from the listening position to each
speaker.
oUnit
Set the unit of distance.
Feet (Default)
Meters
oStep
Set the minimum variable width of the distance.
1 ft (Default) / 0.1 ft
0.1 m / 0.01 m
oSet Defaults
The “Distances” settings are returned to the default settings.
oSet the distance
0.0 ft – 60.0 ft / 0.00 m – 18.00 m
0The speakers that can be selected differ depending on the “Amp Assign” and
“Speaker Config.” settings. (v p. 221, 236)
0Default settings:
Front L / Front R / F. Height L / F. Height R / F. Wide L / F. Wide R / Center /
Subwoofer 1 / Subwoofer 2: 12.0 ft (3.60 m)
Speakers other than the above: 10.0 ft (3.00 m)
0Set the difference in the distance between the speakers to less than 20.0 ft
(6.00 m).
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
240
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Levels
Set the volume of the test tone to be the same at the listening position
when it is output from each speaker.
oTest Tone Start
A test tone is output from the selected speaker.
While listening to the test tone, adjust the volume output from the
selected speaker.
–12.0 dB – +12.0 dB (Default : 0.0 dB)
0The set “Levels” are reflected in all sound modes.
0If you wish to adjust the channel level for each input source, carry out the
settings in “Channel Level Adjust”. (v p. 137)
0When headphones are connected to the PHONES connector on this unit, you
cannot set “Levels”.
oSet Defaults
The “Levels” settings are returned to the default settings.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
241
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Crossovers
Set in accordance with the lower limit frequency of the base frequencies
that can be played back through each speaker. See the speaker manual
for information concerning speaker crossover frequency.
oSpeaker Selection
Selects how to set the crossover frequency.
All
(Default):
Sets the same crossover frequency for all
speakers.
Individual: Selects the crossover points for each
speaker individually.
oSet the crossover frequency
40 Hz / 60 Hz / 80 Hz / 90 Hz / 100 Hz / 110 Hz / 120 Hz / 150 Hz /
200 Hz / 250 Hz (Default : 80 Hz)
0“Crossovers” can be set when the “Subwoofer Mode” setting is “LFE+Main”, or
when you have a speaker that is set to “Small”. (v p. 243)
0The default crossover frequency is “80 Hz”, which will work best with the
widest variety of speakers. We recommend setting to a higher frequency that
the crossover frequency when small speakers are used. For example, set to
“250 Hz” when the frequency range of the speakers is 250 Hz – 20 kHz.
0Sound below the crossover frequency is cut off from the output of the
speakers set in “Small”. This cut off bass frequency is output from the
subwoofer or front speakers.
0The speakers that can be set when “Individual” is selected differ depending on
to the “Subwoofer Mode” setting. (v p. 243)
0When “LFE” is selected, speakers set to “Small” at “Speaker Config.” can be
set. If the speakers are set to (v p. 236)“Large”, “Full Band” is displayed
and the setting cannot be made.
0When “LFE+Main” is selected, speakers can be set regardless of the
“Speaker Config.” setting. (v p. 236)
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
242
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Bass
Set subwoofer and LFE signal range playback.
oSubwoofer Mode
Select low range signals to be reproduced by subwoofer.
LFE
(Default):
The low range signal of the channel set to
“Small” speaker size is added to the LFE
signal output from the subwoofer.
LFE+Main:
The low range signal of all channels is
added to the LFE signal output from the
subwoofer.
0“Subwoofer Mode” can be set when “Speaker Config.” - “Subwoofer” in the
menu is set to other than “None”. (v p. 236)
0Play music or a movie source and select the mode offering the strongest bass.
0If “Speaker Config.” - “Front” and “Center” are set to “Large”, and “Subwoofer
Mode” is set to “LFE”, no sound may be output from the subwoofers,
depending on the input signal or selected sound mode. Select “LFE+Main” if
you want the bass signals to always be produced from the subwoofer.
(v p. 236)
oLPF for LFE
Set LFE signal playback range. Set this when you want to change the
playback frequency (low pass filter point) of the subwoofer.
80 Hz / 90 Hz / 100 Hz / 110 Hz / 120 Hz / 150 Hz / 200 Hz / 250 Hz
(Default : 120 Hz)
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
243
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Front Speaker
Set the front speaker A/B to use for every sound mode.
A
(Default):Front speaker A is used.
B : Front speaker B is used.
A+B : Both front speakers A and B are used.
0This can be set when “Assign Mode” is set to “7.1ch + Front B”. (v p. 221)
0This can be set by pressing SPKR A/B on the main unit.
2ch Playback
Select the method for setting the speakers used in the 2-channel direct
and stereo playback modes.
oSetting
Select the method for setting the speakers used in the 2-channel direct
and stereo playback modes.
Auto
(Default):The settings in “Speakers” are applied. (v p. 210)
Manual: Set the speakers for 2-channel playback. Make the
following settings:
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
244
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oFront
Set the size of the front speakers for 2-channel playback.
Large
(Default):
Use a large speaker that can adequately play back
very low bass frequencies.
Small: Use a small speaker that has inadequate playback
capacity for very low bass frequencies.
When “Speaker Config.”-“Subwoofer” in the menu is set to “None”, “Large” is
automatically set. (v p. 236)
oSubwoofer
Set the presence of a subwoofer.
Yes
(Default):Use a subwoofer.
No: Select when a subwoofer is not connected.
When “Speaker Config.”-“Subwoofer” in the menu is set to “None”, No is
automatically set. (v p. 236) If the “Front” setting is “Small”, the setting is
automatically “Yes”.
oSW Mode
Select low range signals to be reproduced by subwoofer.
LFE
(Default):
When “2ch Playback”-“Front” is set to “Large”, only
LFE signals are output from the subwoofer. Also,
when “2ch Playback” - “Front” is set to “Small”, the
front channel low range signals are added to the
LFE signals and output from the subwoofer.
LFE+Main: The front channel low range signal is added to the
LFE signal output from the subwoofer.
This can be set when “2ch Playback”-“Subwoofer” is set to “Yes”.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
245
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oCrossover
Set the maximum frequency of the bass signal output from each
channel to the subwoofer.
40 Hz / 60 Hz / 80 Hz / 90 Hz / 100 Hz / 110 Hz / 120 Hz / 150 Hz /
200 Hz / 250 Hz (Default : 80 Hz)
0This can be set when “2ch Playback”-“Subwoofer” is set to “Yes”.
0When “2ch Playback”-“Front” is set to “Large” and “SW Mode” is set to LFE,
“Full Band” is displayed and this cannot be set.
oDistance FL/Distance FR
Set distance from main listening position to speaker.
0.0ft – 60.0ft (Default : 12.0ft) /
0.00m – 18.00m (Default : 3.60m)
Set the difference in the distance between the speakers to less than 20.0 ft (6.00
m).
oLevel FL/Level FR
Adjust the level of each channel.
-12.0dB – +12.0dB (Default : 0.0dB)
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
246
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Network
To use this unit by connecting it to a home network (LAN), you must configure network settings.
If you set up your home network (LAN) via DHCP, set “DHCP” to “On”. (Use the default setting.) This allows this unit to use your home network (LAN).
When assigning an IP address to each device manually, you need to assign an IP address to this unit using the “IP Address” settings, and enter
information about your home network (LAN) such as the gateway address and subnet mask, etc.
Information
Display network information.
Friendly Name / Connection / SSID / DHCP / IP Address /
MAC Address
MAC Address is required to create a vTuner account.
Connection
Choose whether to connect the home network to a wireless LAN or a
wired LAN.
When connecting to the network using wired LAN, select “Wired
(Ethernet)” after connecting a LAN cable,
When connecting to the network using wireless LAN, select “Wireless (Wi-
Fi)” and configure the “Wi-Fi Setup”.
oConnect Using
Select the method for connecting to the home network (LAN).
Wired (Ethernet): Use a LAN cable to connect to a network.
Wireless (Wi-Fi): Use the wireless LAN (Wi-Fi) function to connect
to a network.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
247
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Wi-Fi Setup
Connect to a wireless LAN (Wi-Fi) router.
The router can be connected in the following ways. Select the connection
method to suit your home environment.
oScan Networks
Select the network you wish to connect to from the list of possible
networks shown on the TV screen.
1. Select the network you wish to connect to from the list of wireless
networks.
Select “Rescan” if the network cannot be found.
2. Enter your password and select “OK”.
oUse iOS Device
Use your iOS device (iPhone/iPod/iPad) to connect to the network. By
connecting your iOS device to this unit, the unit can be automatically
connected to the same network as your device.
This unit can be connected to your iOS device in two ways, using a
USB cable and using Wi-Fi.
nWhen connecting using Wi-Fi
1. Select “Wireless connection” on the TV screen.
2. Check that your iOS device is connected to the wireless LAN
(Wi-Fi) router and select “Marantz SR7009” from “SET UP NEW
AIRPLAY SPEAKER...” at the bottom of the Wi-Fi configuration
screen of your iOS device.
3. Tap “Next” on the screen of the iOS device.
The iOS device firmware version needs to support iOS7 or later.
nWhen using a USB cable
1. Select “USB cable” on the TV screen.
2. Check that your iOS device is connected to the wireless LAN
(Wi-Fi) and connect it to the USB port on the front panel using a
USB cable.
3. Select “Connect” on the TV screen.
4. Tap “Allow” when the connection message appears on the
screen of your iOS device.
The iOS device firmware version needs to support iOS5 or later.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
248
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oWPS Router
Use a WPS-compatible router to connect.
There are two ways to connect, using the push button method or the
PIN code method. Select the connection method to match your router.
nWhen connecting using the push button method
1. Select “Push Button” on the TV screen.
2. Switch to the WPS mode by pressing the WPS button of the
router you wish to connect to.
0The time for pressing the button varies depending on the
router.
3. Select “Connect” on the TV screen within 2 minutes.
nWhen connecting using the PIN code method
1. Select “PIN” on the TV screen.
2. Select the network you wish to connect to from the list of
wireless networks.
This displays the PIN code of the unit on the TV screen.
3. Register the PIN code of the unit in the router.
oManual
Enter the name (SSID) and password of the network you wish to
connect to.
1. Set the following items.
SSID: Input the name of the wireless network (SSID).
Security: Select the encryption method according to the
encryption setting of the access point you are using.
Password: Input the password.
Default Key:
Select the Default Key.
When connecting to a “WEP” encrypted network,
“Default Key” menu is displayed.
2. Select “Connect” at the end of the setting.
The wireless LAN (Wi-Fi) settings of this unit can also be configured from a PC or
tablet that supports wireless LAN connection.
When using a device that has a firmware version of iOS7 or later, “When connecting
using Wi-Fi” (v p. 248) in “Use iOS Device”.
1. Press and hold the DIMMER and ZONE SELECT buttons on the main unit for at
least 3 seconds when the power of the unit is on.
2. Connect the wireless LAN of the PC or tablet used to “Marantz SR7009” when the
message “Connect your Wi-Fi device to Wi-Fi network called “Marantz SR7009””
appears in the display.
3. Start up the browser and enter “192.168.1.16” in the URL.
4. Use the browser to enter the settings, select “Connect” and then exit the settings.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
249
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Settings
Configure the proxy settings and IP address.
0If you are using a broadband router (DHCP function), the information
required for network connection such as the IP address will be
automatically configured since the DHCP function is set to “On” in the
default settings of this unit.
0Set up the IP Address, Subnet Mask, Default Gateway and DNS server
information only when assigning a fixed IP address or when connecting
to a network without DHCP function.
0Configure the proxy settings when using a proxy server to connect to
the Internet.
.
DHCP
-IP Address
-Subnet Mask
Proxy
Save
Cancel
-Address
-Port
-Default Gateway
-Primary DNS
-Secondary DNS
Configures the network settings manually
Off
000.000.000.000
On(Address)
000.000.000.000
00000
Network/Settings
192.168.001.002
255.255.255.000
192.168.001.001
192.168.001.001
oDHCP
Selects how to connect to the network.
On
(Default):
Configure the network settings
automatically from your router.
Off: Configure the network settings manually.
oIP Address
Set the IP address within the ranges shown below.
0The Network Audio function cannot be used if other IP addresses
are set.
CLASS A:10.0.0.1 - 10.255.255.254
CLASS B:172.16.0.1 - 172.31.255.254
CLASS C:192.168.0.1 - 192.168.255.254
oSubnet Mask
When connecting an xDSL modem or connector adapter directly to
this unit, input the subnet mask indicated in the documentation
supplied by your provider. Normally input 255.255.255.0.
oDefault Gateway
When connected to a gateway (router), input its IP address.
oPrimary DNS, Secondary DNS
If there is only one DNS address indicated in the documentation
supplied by your provider, input it at “Primary DNS”. If two or more
DNS are provided by your provider, enter both “Primary DNS” and
“Secondary DNS”.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
250
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oProxy
Make this setting when connecting to the Internet via a proxy server.
Make the proxy settings only when you connect to the Internet via a
proxy server that is on your internal network or provided by your
provider, etc.
On(Address): Select when inputting by address.
On(Name): Select when inputting by domain name.
Off
(Default):Disables the proxy server.
oPort
Enter port number.
0If you cannot connect to the Internet, recheck the connections and settings.
(v p. 73)
0If you do not understand about Internet connection, contact your ISP (Internet
Service Provider) or the store from which you purchased your computer.
IP Control
Enables network communication in standby power mode.
Off In Standby: Suspend network function during standby.
Always On
(Default):
Network is on during standby. Main unit
operable with a network compatible
controller.
When using the web control function or Marantz Remote App, use with the “IP
Control” setting set to “Always On”.
NOTE
When “IP Control” is set to “Always On”, it consumes more standby power.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
251
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Friendly Name
The Friendly Name is the name of this unit displayed on the network. You
can change the Friendly Name according to your preferences.
oFriendly Name
Selects Friendly Name from the list.
When you select “Other”, you can change the Friendly Name
according to your preferences.
Home Theater / Living Room / Family Room / Guest Room /
Kitchen / Dining Room / Master Bedroom / Bedroom / Den /
Office / Other
0Up to 63 characters can be input.
For character input, see “Using the keyboard screen” (v p. 180).
0The default Friendly Name on first use is “Marantz SR7009”.
oSet Defaults
Restores Friendly Name, which you had changed, to the default
setting.
Diagnostics
Used to check the network connection.
oPhysical Connection
Checks the physical LAN port connection.
OK
Error: The LAN cable is not connected. Check the connection.
When connected using a wireless LAN, “Connection Wireless (Wi-Fi)” will be
displayed.
oRouter Access
Checks the connection from this unit to the router.
OK
Error: Failed to communicate with the router. Check the router
settings.
oInternet Access
Checks whether this unit has access to the Internet (WAN).
OK
Error: Failed to connect to the Internet. Check the Internet connection
environment or router settings.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
252
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Maintenance Mode
Use when receiving maintenance from a Marantz service engineer or
custom installer. Ordinarily, this mode isn’t suitable for use by the end
user, only by a trained service technician or custom installation
professional.
NOTE
Only use this function if so instructed by a Marantz serviceperson or installer.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
253
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

General
Make various other settings.
Language
Set the language for display the menu on the TV screen.
English / Français / Español (Default : English)
“Language” can also be set up by the following operation. However, the menu screen
is not displayed. Watch the display while configuring the settings.
1. Press and hold the main unit’s STATUS and ZONE SELECT at the
same time for at least 3 seconds.
“Video Format <NTSC>” appears on the display.
2. Press the main unit’s i.
“GUI Language ENGLISH” appears on the display.
3. Use the main unit’s o or p and set the language.
4. Press the main unit’s ENTER to complete the setting.
ECO
Configure the settings of the ECO Mode and auto standby mode.
oECO Mode
This mode can reduce the power consumption when the power of the
unit is on.
On: Reduce the power consumption.
Auto: The power consumption is automatically
reduced to match the volume.
Off
(Default):Do not reduce the power consumption.
0When you want to output audio at a high volume level, it is recommended to
set “ECO Mode” to “Off”.
0Eco mode can also be switched by pressing ECO G on the remote control
unit.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
254
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oPower On Default
Set the mode to ECO when the power is on.
Last
(Default):
The ECO Mode will be set to the previous
setting before the power was switched off.
On:
When power is turned on, the mode will
always be switched to the ECO Mode in
“On”.
Auto:
When power is turned on, the mode will
always be switched to the ECO Mode in
“Auto”.
Off:
When power is turned on, the mode will
always be switched to the ECO Mode in
“Off”.
oOn Screen Display
Display the power consumption of this unit using a meter on the TV
screen.
Always On: Always display the meter on the TV screen.
Auto
(Default):
Display the meter when changing the mode
or volume.
Off: Do not display the meter.
oAuto Standby
Set so the unit power automatically switches to standby.
nMAIN ZONE
Sets the time for switching to auto standby when there are no audio or
video signals input into this unit.
Before the unit enters standby mode, “Auto Standby” is displayed on
the unit display and the menu screen.
60 min:
The unit goes into standby after 60 minutes.
30 min:
The unit goes into standby after 30 minutes.
15 min:
The unit goes into standby after 15 minutes.
Off
(Default):
The unit does not go into standby
automatically.
nZONE2 / ZONE3
When there are no operations for a certain period of time as set here,
the power is automatically shut off even if there is audio or video input.
8 hours: Switches ZONE2/ZONE3 the standby state
after about 8 hours.
4 hours: Switches ZONE2/ZONE3 to the standby
state after about 4 hours.
2 hours: Switches ZONE2/ZONE3 to the standby
state after about 2 hours.
Off
(Default):
Does not automatically switch ZONE2/
ZONE3 to the standby state.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
255
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

ZONE2 Setup / ZONE3 Setup
Makes settings for audio playback with ZONE2 and ZONE3.
Values set for “Volume Limit” and “Power On Volume” are displayed according to the
setting specified for the volume “Scale”. (v p. 186)
oBass
Adjust bass.
-10 dB – +10 dB (Default : 0 dB)
oTreble
Adjust treble.
-10 dB – +10 dB (Default : 0 dB)
oHigh Pass Filter
Make settings for cutting the low range to reduce distortion in the bass.
On: The low range is attenuated.
Off
(Default):The low range is not attenuated.
oLch Level
Adjust the left channel output level.
-12 dB – +12 dB (Default : 0 dB)
oRch Level
Adjust the right channel output level.
-12 dB – +12 dB (Default : 0 dB)
oChannel
Set whether to playback in stereo or monaural.
Stereo
(Default):Stereo playback.
Mono: Monaural playback.
oHDMI Audio (ZONE2 only)
Selects the audio signal format for playing an HDMI source in ZONE2.
Through
(Default):
The HDMI audio signal is passed through this unit to the
device in ZONE2.
PCM:
The HDMI audio signal input into this unit is converted to a
PCM signal that can be output from the ZONE2 PRE OUT
terminals or speaker terminals.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
256
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oVolume Level
Set the volume output level.
Variable
(Default):Volume can be adjusted.
1 – 98
(–79.5 dB – 18.0 dB):
Volume is fixed at the desired level. The
volume cannot be adjusting using the remote
control unit.
oVolume Limit
Make a setting for maximum volume.
60 (-20 dB) / 70 (-10 dB) / 80 (0 dB)
(Default : 70 (-10 dB))
Off: Do not set a maximum volume.
This can be set when “Volume Level” is set to “Variable”. (v p. 257)
oPower On Volume
Define the volume setting that is active when the power is turned on.
Last
(Default):
Use the memorized setting from the last
session.
Mute: Always use the muting on condition.
1 – 98
(–79.5 dB – 18.0 dB): The volume is adjusted to the set level.
This can be set when “Volume Level” is set to “Variable”. (v p. 257)
oMute Level
Set the amount of attenuation when muting is on.
Full
(Default):The sound is muted entirely.
–40 dB : The sound is attenuated by 40 dB down.
–20 dB : The sound is attenuated by 20 dB down.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
257
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Zone Rename
Change the display title of each zone to one you prefer.
MAIN ZONE / ZONE2 / ZONE3
Set Defaults: The default setting is restored for the edited zone name.
Up to 10 characters can be input.
For character input, see “Using the keyboard screen” (v p. 180).
Smart Select Names
Change the smart select name that appears on the TV screen to one you
prefer.
Smart Select 1 / Smart Select 2 / Smart Select 3 / Smart Select 4
Set Defaults: The default setting is restored for the edited smart select
name.
Up to 16 characters can be input.
For character input, see “Using the keyboard screen” (v p. 180).
Trigger Out 1 / Trigger Out 2
Select the conditions for activating trigger out.
For details about how to connect the DC OUT jacks, see “DC OUT
jacks” (v p. 76).
nWhen setting for zone (MAIN ZONE / ZONE2 /
ZONE3)
Trigger out is activated through linkage to the power of the zone set to
“On”.
nWhen setting for input source
Activates trigger out when the input source set to “On” is selected.
nWhen setting for HDMI monitor
Activates trigger out when the HDMI monitor set to “On” is selected.
On: Activate trigger on this mode.
– – –: Do not activate trigger on this mode.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
258
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Front Display
Makes settings related to the display on this unit.
oDimmer
Adjust the display brightness of this unit.
Bright
(Default):Normal display brightness.
Dim: Reduced display brightness.
Dark: Very low display brightness.
Off: Turns the display off.
You can also adjust the display by pressing DIMMER on the main unit.
oChannel Indicators
Sets whether to use the input signal display or output signal display for
the channel indication on the display.
Input: Uses the input signal display for the
channel indication on the display.
Output
(Default):
Uses the output signal display for the
channel indication on the display.
Information
Show information about this unit settings, input signals, etc.
oAudio
Show the audio information for MAIN ZONE.
Sound Mode: The currently set sound mode.
Input Signal: The input signal type.
Format: The number of input signal channels (presence of
front, surround, LFE).
Sample Rate: The input signal’s sampling frequency.
Offset: The dialogue normalization correction value.
Flag:
This is displayed when inputting signals including a
surround back channel. “MATRIX” is displayed with
DTS-ES Matrix input signals, “DISCRETE” with DTS-
ES Discrete signals.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
259
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oVideo
Show the HDMI input/output signals and HDMI monitor information for
MAIN ZONE.
HDMI Signal Info.
Resolution / Color Space / Pixel Depth
HDMI Monitor 1 / HDMI Monitor 2
Interface / Resolutions
oZONE
Show information about current settings.
MAIN ZONE:
This item shows information about settings for
MAIN ZONE. The information displayed differs
according to the input source.
ZONE2: This item shows information about settings for
ZONE2.
ZONE3: This item shows information about settings for
ZONE3.
oFirmware
Version: Displays information for the current firmware.
oNotifications
Displays and sets notifications.
Also, sets whether or not to display the notification when the power is
turned on.
Notification Alerts
On
(Default):Notification messages are displayed.
Off: Notification messages are not displayed.
Press INFO on the remote control unit to display current source name, volume,
sound mode name, and other information at the bottom of the screen.
.
AUDYSSEY
SIGNAL
EXT FHRFHL
SB SBRSBL
CFR FWRFLFWL
LFE SRSL
SBRSBL
CFRFL
SW1 SRSL
INPUT SIGNAL ACTIVE SPEAKERS
SOUND
SOURCE
Dynamic EQ : On
MultEQ XT32 : Reference
Dynamic Volume : Medium
DOLBY TrueHD
50.0
DOLBY TrueHD
Blu-ray
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
260
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Usage Data
To help us improve our products and customer service, Marantz collects
anonymous information about how you use your AV receiver (such as
frequently used input sources and sound modes and speaker settings).
Marantz will never provide any information we collect to third parties.
Yes: Provide information on the operating status of this unit.
No: Do not provide information on the operating status of this unit.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
261
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Firmware
Checks for the latest firmware information about updates and upgrades,
updates the firmware, and sets up the notification message display for
updates and upgrades.
oUpdate
Updates the firmware of this unit.
Check for
Update:
Checks to see if the firmware is the latest version. You
can also check approximately how long it will take to
complete an update.
Update
Start:
Execute the update process. When the update starts,
the menu screen is shut down. During the update, the
progress is shown on the display.
This unit automatically retries updating if updating fails. If the update still fails,
either one of the following messages will appear on the screen. If the display
reads as shown below, check the settings and network environment, then update
again.
Display Description
Updating fail Updating failed.
Login failed Failure to log into server.
Server is busy Server is busy. Wait a while then try again.
Connection fail Failure in connecting to server.
Download fail Downloading of the firmware has failed.
oNotifications
When the latest firmware is available, a notification message is
displayed on the TV screen at power on.
The notification message is displayed for about 40 seconds when the
power is turned on.
Update
On
(Default):Display update message.
Off: Do not display update message.
Upgrade
On
(Default):Display upgrade message.
Off: Do not display upgrade message.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
262
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oAdd New Feature
Display new features that can be downloaded to this unit and perform
an upgrade.
Upgrade
Package: Display the items to be upgraded.
Upgrade
Status:
Display a list of the additional functions provided by
the upgrade.
Upgrade Start:
Execute the upgrade process.
When the upgrade starts, the menu screen is shut
down. During the upgrade, the amount of upgrade
time which has elapsed is displayed.
0See the Marantz website for details about upgrades.
0When the procedure is complete, “Registered” is displayed in this menu and
upgrades can be carried out. If the procedure has not been carried out, “Not
Registered” is displayed.
The ID number shown on this screen is needed when carrying out the
procedure.
The ID number can also be displayed by pressing and holding the main unit’s
o and SETUP for at least 3 seconds.
0If the upgrade is not successful, an error message identical to those in
“Firmware” - “Update” will appear on the display. Check the settings and
network environment and then perform the upgrade again.
Notes concerning use of “Update” and “Add New Feature”
0In order to use these functions, you must have the correct system
requirements and settings for an Internet connection. (v p. 73)
0Do not turn off the power until updating or upgrading is completed.
0Approximately 1 hour is required for the updating/upgrading procedure
to be completed.
0Once updating/upgrade starts, normal operations on this unit cannot
be performed until updating/upgrading is completed. Furthermore,
there may be cases where backup data is reset for the parameters,
etc., set on this unit.
0If the update or upgrade fails, press and hold the X on the main unit for
more than 5 seconds, or remove and re-insert the power cord. “Update
Retry” appears on the display and update restarts from the point at
which update failed. If the error continues despite this, check the
network environment.
Information regarding the “Update” function and “Add New Feature” will be
announced on the Marantz web site each time related plans are defined.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
263
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Setup Lock
Protect settings from inadvertent changes.
oLock
On: Turn protection on.
Off
(Default):Turn protection off.
When cancelling the setting, set “Lock” to “Off”.
NOTE
When “Lock” is set to “On”, no setting items are displayed except for “Setup
Lock”.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
264
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Operating external devices with the remote control unit
.
SMART
SELECT
1 – 4
0 – 9
SET
INFO
CH/PAGE d
OPTION
ENTER
AVR
Input source
select buttons
When preset codes are registered in the included remote control unit, it
can then be used to operate any devices you have, such as DVD players
or TVs made by different manufacturers.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
265
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Registering preset codes
There are two methods for registering preset codes; the simple method for
registering preset codes of Marantz players, the method for registering the
preset numbers of other manufacturers’ devices, and the method for
experimenting with preset codes one by one for registration.
●“Registering Marantz Players”(v p. 266)
●“Registering by entering preset numbers”(v p. 267)
oRegistering Marantz Players
Use the following simple method to register the preset codes of
Marantz Blu-ray Disc players, DVD players and CD players.
nRegistering Blu-ray Disc Players
1Press and hold down Blu-ray and OPTION until “OK”
indicator on the remote control display is flashing, then
release.
nRegistering DVD Players
1Press and hold down DVD and OPTION until “OK”
indicator on the remote control display is flashing, then
release.
nRegistering CD Players
1Press and hold down CD and OPTION until “OK”
indicator on the remote control display is flashing, then
release.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
266
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

nRegistering multiple players at the same time
1Press and hold down the SMART SELECT 1 – 4 and
OPTION until “OK” indicator on the remote control
display is flashing, then release.
Devices to be registered at the
same time Press and hold down
the buttons
Blu-ray Disc
player
DVD player CD player
P P SMART SELECT 1 and
OPTION
P P SMART SELECT 2 and
OPTION
P P SMART SELECT 3 and
OPTION
P P P SMART SELECT 4 and
OPTION
NOTE
Depending on the model and year of manufacture of your device, some buttons may
not operate. In this case, try “Registering by entering preset numbers” (v p. 267).
oRegistering by entering preset numbers
Before starting, confirm the preset number of the device that you want
to register and the buttons that can be registered in the “Preset Code
Table” (v p. 339) in the Appendix.
1Press and hold down the input source select button
that you want to register the preset code to and SET
until “PRSET” indicator on the remote control display
is flashing, then release.
2Enter the preset number (4 digits) listed for the device
in the Preset Code Table using the number buttons (0 –
9) on the remote control.
0Some manufacturers use more than one type of remote control code. Preset
codes to change the number and verify correct operation.
0If the AV device is not a Marantz device, or if the device does not operate even
when the preset code is registered, use the learning function. Remote codes for
different devices can be remembered for use by the Marantz remote control
included with this device. (v p. 339)
NOTE
Depending on the model and year of manufacture of your device, some buttons may
not operate.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
267
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oExperimenting with preset codes one by one
for registration
1Switch the power on of the device for which you want
to set the preset code.
2Press and hold down the input source select button
that you want to register the preset code to and SET
until “PRSET” indicator on the remote control display
is flashing, then release.
3Aim the remote control at the appliance and slowly
alternate between pressing CH/PAGE d and DEVICE X
for the appliance.
The preset code is shown in the remote control display.
4Stop when the appliance turns off.
5Press ENTER once to lock in the code.
0Some manufacturers use more than one type of remote control code. Preset
codes to change the number and verify correct operation.
0If the AV device is not a Marantz device, or if the device does not operate even
when the preset code is registered, use the learning function. Remote codes for
different devices can be remembered for use by the Marantz remote control
included with this device. (v p. 339)
NOTE
Depending on the model and year of manufacture of your device, some buttons may
not operate.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
268
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Operating devices
To operate an external device, press the input source button registered
with the preset code, followed by one of the buttons in the following tables.
0When operating an external device, the display on the remote control unit shows
the input source name.
0The “TV” indicator lights when the TV is being operated.
0To operate the menu of this unit, press AVR before operating the unit. The “AVR”
indicator lights when this unit is being operated.
nTV group
(TV) operation
Operation buttons Function
TV XTV power on/off
TV INPUT Switch TV input
TV MENU TV menu
CH/PAGE df Switch channels (up/down)
INFO Information
OPTION Sub menu, Option
u i o pCursor operation
ENTER(Cursor) Enter
BACK Back
8 9Skip chapter
1Playback
6 7Fast-reverse / Fast-forward
3Pause
2Stop
0 – 9, +10 Channel selection
TV X and TV INPUT buttons can be operated at any time without
pressing the TV button.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
269
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

nDVD group
(DVD player / DVD recorder) operation
Operation buttons Function
DEVICE XPower on/off
DEVICE MENU (Popup) Menu
INFO Information
OPTION Top menu
u i o pCursor operation
ENTER Enter
BACK Back
SETUP Setup
2Stop
3Pause
1Playback
8 9Skip chapter
6 7Fast-reverse / Fast-forward
0 – 9, +10 Select title, chapter or channel
selection
Depending on the device, the DEVICE X button only performs
the power-on operation.
nCD group
(CD player / CD recorder) operation
Operation buttons Function
DEVICE XPower on/off
DEVICE MENU (Popup) Menu
INFO Information
u i o pCursor operation
ENTER Enter
2Stop
3Pause
1Playback
8 9Skip chapter
6 7Fast-reverse / Fast-forward
0 – 9, +10 Select title, chapter or channel
selection
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
270
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

nCBL/SAT group
(Set top box for satellite (SAT)/cable TV (CBL)/
Media player/IP TV) operation
Operation buttons Function
DEVICE XPower on/off
DEVICE MENU Menu
CH/PAGE df Switch channels (up/down)
INFO Information
u i o pCursor operation
ENTER Enter
BACK Back
SETUP Setup
HOME Home menu
2Stop
3Pause
1Playback
8 9Skip chapter
6 7Fast-reverse / Fast-forward
0 – 9, +10 Channel selection
Depending on the device, the DEVICE X button only performs
the power-on operation.
nBD group
(Blu-ray Disc player) operation
Operation buttons Function
DEVICE XPower on/off
DEVICE MENU (Popup) Menu
INFO Information
OPTION Top menu
u i o pCursor operation
ENTER Enter
BACK Back
SETUP Setup
HOME Home menu
2Stop
3Pause
1Playback
8 9Skip chapter
6 7Fast-reverse / Fast-forward
0 – 9, +10 Select title, chapter or channel
selection
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
271
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Check the registered preset code
1Press and hold an input source select button for which
you want to check the preset code and the SET button
until the display on the remote control unit shows
“PRSET”.
2Press INFO.
The set code is shown for 3 seconds in the remote control display.
Initializing registered preset codes
1Press and hold down AVR and OPTION until “OK”
indicator on the remote control display is flashing, then
release.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
272
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Operating learn function
.
TV AUDIO
SET
CBL/SAT
DVD
Blu-ray
AUX1
GAME
AUX2
MEDIA PLAYER
CD
If the device does not operate even when the preset code is registered,
use the learning function. Remote codes for different devices can be
remembered for use by the Marantz remote control included with this
device.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
273
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Remembering remote control codes
from other devices
1Place the Marantz remote control and remote control
from the other device approximately 5 cm apart, with
the remote control signal transmission sections facing
each other.
2Press and hold SET until the LEARN indicator blinks.
3Press input source select buttons to select the input
source.
The input source is shown in the remote control display.
4Select the button to be learned.
LEARN indicator lights up.
5Press and hold the button that you want to register on
the other remote control until “OK” is displayed on the
Marantz remote control display.
0If “NG” is shown on the remote control display, perform step 4
again.
6Repeat steps 4 and 5 to learn other buttons for the
same input source.
7When programming of the remote control unit is
completed, press SET.
The LEARN indicator turns off, and the remote control unit exits
learn mode.
0There are some remote control units that cannot be programmed, or even if they
can be programmed, they may not operate correctly. If this happens, use the
remote control unit supplied with the AV equipment to operate it.
0If the remote control memory becomes full, “FULL” is shown on the remote control
display. If you want to learn the code, you should erase other learned button.
NOTE
0The learning function is unavailable for all ZONE SELECT, SET, AVR, POWER X,
VOLUME df, SMART SELECT, SOUND MODE and input source select buttons
in any mode.
0If no buttons are pressed for approximately 1 minutes while in the LEARN mode,
the remote control unit automatically exits from the LEARN mode.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
274
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Delete saved remote control codes
Codes can be erased in three ways: by buttons, sources, and by all
memory contents.
oDelete remote control codes for each button
1Press and hold SET until the LEARN indicator blinks.
2Press input source select buttons to select the input
source you want to delete.
The input source is shown in the remote control display.
3Press and hold POWER X and press the learned button
to be erased twice.
“ERASE” is shown in the remote control display.
4Press SET.
0The LEARN indicator turn off.
oDelete remote control codes for each input
source
1Press and hold SET until the LEARN indicator blinks.
2Press and hold POWER X and press the learned input
source select buttons to be erased twice.
“ERASE” is shown in the remote control display.
3Press SET.
0The LEARN indicator turn off.
oDelete remote control codes for all input
sources
1Press and hold SET until the LEARN indicator blinks.
2Press and hold POWER X and press AVR twice.
“ERASE” is shown in the remote control display.
3Press SET.
0The LEARN indicator turn off.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
275
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Setting the back light
.
Light button
SET
You can turn off the backlight of the remote control unit.
0Backlight is set on in the factory settings.
Disabling the backlight
1Press and hold both SET and Light button until “OFF”
indicator flashes twice.
Turning the backlight on
1Press and hold both SET and Light button until “ON”
indicator flashes twice.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
276
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Specifying the zone used with the remote control unit
.
ui
ENTER
SET
ZONE
SELECT
When the ZONE SELECT is pressed, only the set zone can be operated
with the remote control unit.
This is useful for preventing mistaken operation.
0The factory setting is “M23”.
1Press and hold ZONE SELECT and SET for at least 3
seconds.
2Use ui to set the zone to be used and press ENTER.
“SET” flashes four times on the remote control unit and the normal
operation mode is restored.
Remote control unit display
Zone to be used
M MAIN ZONE only
M2 MAIN ZONE / ZONE2
M23
MAIN ZONE / ZONE2 / ZONE3
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
277
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oContents
Tips
I want the volume not to become too loud by mistake 279
I want to keep the volume at the same level when I turn the power on 279
I want to have the subwoofer always output audio 279
I want to make human voices in the movies clearer 279
I want to keep bass and clarity during playback at a lower volume
level 279
I want to automatically adjust the volume level difference in content
such as TV and movies 279
I want to set the optimized listening environment after changing the
configuration/position of the speakers or changing a speaker to a new
one 280
I want to combine a desired video with the current music 280
I want to play back photos from Flickr at the same time while listening
to the Internet radio 280
I want to delete unused input sources 280
I want to enjoy the same music in all zones at the home party, etc. 280
I want to minimize the delay in video signals when I’m playing a game
on my game console 280
Troubleshooting
Power does not turn on / Power is turned off 282
Operations cannot be performed through the remote control unit 283
Display on this unit shows nothing 283
No sound comes out 284
Desired sound does not come out 285
Sound is interrupted or noise occurs 287
No video is shown on the TV 288
The menu screen is not displayed on the TV 290
iPod cannot be played back 291
USB memory devices cannot be played back 292
File names on the iPod/USB memory device are not displayed
properly 293
Bluetooth cannot be played back 293
The Internet radio cannot be played back 294
Music files on PC or NAS cannot be played back 295
Various online services cannot be played 295
The HDMI control function does not work 296
When it is not possible to connect to a wireless LAN network 297
When using HDMI ZONE2, the devices does not function properly 298
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
Tips
278
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Tips
I want the volume not to become too loud by mistake
0Set the volume upper limit for “Volume Limit” in the menu beforehand. This prevents children or others from increasing the volume too much by mistake.
You can set this for each zone. (v p. 186, 257)
I want to keep the volume at the same level when I turn the power on
0By default, the volume setting when power was previously set to standby on this unit is applied at next power on with no change. To use a fixed volume
level, set the volume level at power on for “Power On Volume” in the menu. You can set this for each zone. (v p. 186, 257)
I want to have the subwoofer always output audio
0Depending on the input signals and sound mode, the subwoofer may not output audio. When “Subwoofer Mode” in the menu is set to “LFE+Main”, you
can have the subwoofer always output audio. (v p. 243)
I want to make human voices in the movies clearer
0Select a setting that makes the dialog easier to hear in the option menu “Dialog Enhancer”. (v p. 136)
I want to keep bass and clarity during playback at a lower volume level
0Set “Dynamic EQ” in the menu to “On”. This setting corrects the frequency characteristics to allow you to enjoy clear sound without the bass being lost
even during playback at a lower volume level. (v p. 188)
I want to automatically adjust the volume level difference in content such as TV and movies
0Set “Dynamic Volume” in the menu. Volume level changes (between quiet scenes and loud scenes) in TV shows or movies are automatically adjusted
to your desired level. (v p. 189)
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
279
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

I want to set the optimized listening environment after changing the configuration/position of the speakers or changing a speaker to a new
one.
0Perform Audyssey® Setup. This automatically makes the optimized speaker settings for the new listening environment. (v p. 210)
I want to combine a desired video with the current music
0Set “Video Select” in the option menu to “On”. You can combine the current music with your desired video source from a Set-top Box or DVD, etc. while
listening to music from the Tuner, CD, Phono, Internet radio or Bluetooth. (v p. 139)
I want to play back photos from Flickr at the same time while listening to the Internet radio
0After playing back photos from Flickr, start the slide show on the Internet radio playback screen. (v p. 135)
I want to delete unused input sources
0Set unused input sources for “Hide Sources” in the menu. This allows you to skip unused input sources when turning the INPUT SELECTOR knob on
this unit. (v p. 208)
I want to enjoy the same music in all zones at the home party, etc.
0Set “All Zone Stereo” in the option menu to “Start”. You can simultaneously play back music in another room (ZONE2, ZONE3) that is played back in
MAIN ZONE. (v p. 141)
I want to minimize the delay in video signals when I’m playing a game on my game console
0When the video is delayed against button operations with the controller on the game console, set “Video Mode” in the menu to “Game”. (v p. 199)
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
280
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Troubleshooting
If a problem should arise, first check the following:
1. Are the connections correct?
2. Is the set being operated as described in the owner’s manual?
3. Are the other devices operating properly?
If this unit does not operate properly, check the corresponding symptoms in this section.
If the symptoms do not match any of those described here, consult your dealer as it could be due to a fault in this unit. In this case, disconnect the power
immediately and contact the store where you purchased this unit.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
281
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oPower does not turn on / Power is turned off
Symptom Cause / Solution Page
Power does not turn on. 0Check whether the power plug is correctly inserted into the power outlet. 77
Power automatically turns
off.
0The sleep timer is set. Turn on the power again. 157
0“Auto Standby” is set. “Auto Standby” is triggered when there is no operation for a set amount of time. To
disable “Auto Standby”, set “Auto Standby” on the menu to “Off”.
255
Power turns off and the
power indicator flashes in
red approx. every 2
seconds.
0The protection circuit has been activated due to a rise in temperature within this unit. Turn the power off,
wait about an hour until this unit cools down sufficiently, and then turn the power on again.
327
0Please re-install this unit in a place having good ventilation. -
Power turns off and the
power indicator flashes in
red approx. every 0.5
seconds.
0Check the speaker connections. The protection circuit may have been activated because speaker cable
core wires came in contact with each other or a core wire was disconnected from the connector and
came in contact with the rear panel of this unit. After unplugging the power cord, take corrective action
such as firmly re-twisting the core wire or taking care of the connector, and then reconnect the wire.
39
0Turn down the volume and turn on the power again. 79
0This unit’s amplifier circuit has failed. Unplug the power cord and contact our customer service center. -
The power to this unit does
not turn off when you press
the Power operation
button. “ZONE2 On” or
“ZONE3 On” appears on
the display.
0Power in either ZONE2 or ZONE3 is on. To turn off the power of the device (standby), press either the
ZONE2 ON/OFF or ZONE3 ON/OFF button on the main unit, or press the POWER X button after
pressing the Z2 or Z3 button on the remote control to turn off the power of ZONE2 or ZONE3.
-
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
282
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oOperations cannot be performed through the remote control unit
Symptom Cause / Solution Page
Operations cannot be
performed through the
remote control unit.
0Batteries are worn out. Replace with new batteries. 9
0Operate the remote control unit within a distance of about 23 ft/7 m from this unit and at an angle of within
30°.
9
0Remove any obstacle between this unit and the remote control unit. -
0Insert the batteries in the proper direction, checking the q and w marks. 9
0The set’s remote control sensor is exposed to strong light (direct sunlight, inverter type fluorescent bulb
light, etc.). Move the set to a place in which the remote control sensor will not be exposed to strong light.
-
0The operation target zone does not correspond to the zone setting specified on the remote control unit.
Press ZONE SELECT to select the zone to operate.
178
0The remote control unit operating mode is used to operate other devices. Press MAIN to set the operating
mode to AVR.
269
0When using a 3D video device, the remote control unit of this unit may not function due to effects of
infrared communications between units (such as TV and glasses for 3D viewing). In this case, adjust the
direction of units with the 3D communications function and their distance to ensure they do not affect
operations from the remote control unit of this unit.
-
oDisplay on this unit shows nothing
Symptom Cause / Solution Page
Display is off. 0Set “Dimmer” on the menu to something other than “Off”. 259
0When the sound mode is set to “Pure Direct”, the display is off. 144
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
283
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oNo sound comes out
Symptom Cause / Solution Page
No sound comes out of
speakers.
0Check the connections for all devices. 39
0Insert connection cables all the way in. -
0Check that input connectors and output connectors are not reversely connected. -
0Check cables for damage. -
0Check that speaker cables are properly connected. Check that cable core wires come in contact with the
metal part on speaker terminals.
39
0Securely tighten the speaker terminals. Check speaker terminals for looseness. 39
0Check that a proper input source is selected. 79
0Adjust the volume. 80
0Cancel the mute mode. 80
0Check the digital audio input connector setting. 206
0Check the digital audio output setting on the connected device. On some devices, the digital audio output
is set to off by default.
-
0When a headphone is plugged into the PHONES jack on the main unit, sound is not output from the
speaker terminal and PRE OUT connector.
-
No sound comes out when
using the DVI-D
connection.
0When this unit is connected to a device equipped with a DVI-D connector, no sound is output. Make a
separate audio connection.
-
No sound comes out of a
TV that is connected via
HDMI.
0Audio signals input to 7.1CH IN connectors on this unit cannot be output to the TV. -
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
284
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oDesired sound does not come out
Symptom Cause / Solution Page
The volume does not
increase.
0The maximum volume is set too low. Set the maximum volume using “Limit” on the menu. 186
0Appropriate volume correction processing is performed according to the input audio format and settings,
so the volume may not reach the upper limit.
-
No sound comes out with
the HDMI connection.
0Check the connection of the HDMI connectors. 60
0When outputting HDMI audio from the speakers, set “HDMI Audio Out” on the menu to “AVR”. To output
from the TV, set “TV”.
196
0When using the HDMI control function, check that the audio output is set to the AV amplifier on the TV. 156
No sound comes out of a
specific speaker.
0Check that speaker cables are properly connected. 39
0Check that a selection other than “None” is set for the “Speaker Config.” setting in menu. 236
0Check the “Assign Mode” setting in the menu. 221
0
When the sound mode is “Stereo” and “Virtual”, audio is only output from the front speakers and subwoofer.
-
No sound is produced from
subwoofer.
0Check the subwoofer connections. 40
0Turn on the subwoofer’s power. -
0Set “Speaker Config.” - “Subwoofer” in the menu to “1 spkr” or “2 spkrs”. 236
0When “Speaker Config.” - “Front” in the menu is set to “Large”, depending on the input signal and the
sound mode, no sound may be output from the subwoofer.
236
0When no subwoofer audio signal (LFE) is included in the input signals, no sound may be output from the
subwoofer.
243
0You can make the subwoofer always output sound by setting the “Subwoofer Mode” to “LFE+Main”. 243
DTS sound is not output. 0Check that the digital audio output setting on the connected device is set to “DTS”. -
0Set “Decode Mode” on the menu to “Auto” or “DTS”. 209
Dolby Atmos, Dolby
TrueHD, DTS-HD, Dolby
Digital Plus audio is not
output.
0Make HDMI connections. 64
0Check the digital audio output setting on the connected device. On some devices, “PCM” is set by
default.
-
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
285
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Symptom Cause / Solution Page
DTS Neo:X mode cannot
be selected.
0It cannot be selected when “Speaker Config.” - “Surround” is set for “None”. 236
0DTS Neo:X cannot be selected when using the headphones. -
Dolby Surround mode
cannot be selected.
0Dolby Surround cannot be selected when using the headphones. -
Audyssey MultEQ® XT32,
Audyssey Dynamic EQ®,
Audyssey Dynamic
Volume® and Audyssey
LFC™ cannot be selected.
0These cannot be selected when you have not performed Audyssey® Setup. 210
0Switch to a sound mode other than “Direct” or “Pure Direct”. 144
0These cannot be selected when using the headphones. -
Audyssey DSX® cannot be
selected.
0It can be selected when using the front height or front wide speakers. 237
0It can be selected when using the center speaker. 236
0Switch the sound mode to Dolby sound mode or DTS sound mode. 143
0This cannot be selected when using the headphones. -
0This cannot be set when the input signal is a 2-channel source. -
“M-DAX” cannot be
selected.
0Check that an analog signal or PCM signal (Sample Rate = 44.1/48 kHz) is input. For playback of
multichannel signals such as Dolby Digital or DTS surround, “M-DAX” cannot be used.
185
0Switch to a sound mode other than “Direct” or “Pure Direct”. 144
No audio is output from
PRE OUT or speakers for
ZONE2/ZONE3.
0In ZONE2/ZONE3, the audio can be played back when signals input from digital connectors (OPTICAL/
COAXIAL) are in 2ch PCM format.
-
0In ZONE2, the audio can be played back when signals input from the HDMI connector are in 2ch PCM
format. To play back the audio in ZONE2 irrespective of the input signal format, set “HDMI Audio” in the
menu to “PCM”. Depending on the played back device, the audio may not be played back even with this
setting. In that case, set the audio format to “PCM (2ch)” on the played back device.
256
0When listening to audio from a Bluetooth device in ZONE2/ZONE3, remove any obstructions between the
Bluetooth device and this unit and use it within a range of about 32.8 ft/10 m.
-
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
286
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oSound is interrupted or noise occurs
Symptom Cause / Solution Page
During playback from the
Internet radio or USB
memory device, sound is
occasionally interrupted.
0When the transfer speed of the USB memory device is slow, sound may occasionally be interrupted. -
0The network communication speed is slow or the radio station is busy. -
When making a call on
iPhone, noise occurs in
audio output on this unit.
0When making a call, keep a distance of 0.7 ft/20 cm or longer between iPhone and this unit. -
Noise often occurs in
FM/AM broadcasting.
0Change the antenna orientation or position. 71
0Separate the AM loop antenna from the unit. -
0Use an FM outdoor antenna. 71
0Separate the antenna from other connection cables. 71
The sounds appear to be
distorted.
0Lower the volume. 80
0Set “Off” to the ECO Mode. When “On” or “Auto” is in the ECO Mode, the audio may by distorted when
the playback volume is high.
254
Sound cuts out when using
Wi-Fi connection.
0If nearby devices cause playback to cut out due to electronic interference, switch to a wired LAN
connection.
73
0Particularly when you play back large music files, depending on your wireless LAN environment, the
playback sound may be interrupted. In this case, make the wired LAN connection.
248
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
287
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oNo video is shown on the TV
Symptom Cause / Solution Page
No picture appears. 0Check the connections for all devices. 60
0Insert connection cables all the way in. -
0Check that input connectors and output connectors are not reversely connected. -
0Check cables for damage. -
0Match the input settings to the input connector of the TV connected to this unit. 206
0Check that the proper input source is selected. 79
0Check the video input connector setting. 206
0Check that the resolution of the player corresponds to that of the TV. 260
0Check whether the TV is compatible with copyright protection (HDCP). If connected to a device not
compatible with HDCP, video will not be output correctly.
302
0The HDMI signal cannot be converted to an analog signal. Use analog connections. 303
0Use an “High Speed HDMI cable with Ethernet” or “High speed cable” that comes with the HDMI logo if
you wish to playback 4K (60/50 Hz) video.
-
No video is shown on the
TV with the DVI-D
connection.
0With the DVI-D connection, on some device combinations, devices may not function properly due to the
copy guard copyright protection (HDCP).
302
No video from an input
source such as a game
console is shown on the
TV.
0When special video signals are input from a game console, etc., the video conversion function may not
function. Connect the input connector to the monitor output connector of the same type.
-
While the menu is being
displayed, no video is
shown on the TV.
0The video being played will not appear in the background of the menu when the menu is operated during
playback of the following video signals.
- Some images of 3D video contents
- Computer resolution images (example: VGA)
- Video with an aspect ratio other than 16:9 or 4:3
- 4K video
-
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
288
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Symptom Cause / Solution Page
When using HDMI ZONE2,
the video output in MAIN
ZONE is interrupted.
0When ZONE2 is operated with the same input source selected for MAIN ZONE and ZONE2, video in
MAIN ZONE may be interrupted.
-
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
289
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oThe menu screen is not displayed on the TV
Symptom Cause / Solution Page
The menu screen or status
information screen is not
displayed on the TV.
0The menu screen is only displayed on this unit and a TV connected with an HDMI cable. If this unit is
connected to a TV using a different video output connector, operate while watching the display on this
unit.
-
0The status information will not appear on the TV when the following video signals are being played.
- Some images of 3D video content
- Computer resolution images (example: VGA)
- Video with an aspect ratio other than 16:9 or 4:3
143
0When a 2D video is converted to a 3D video on the TV, the menu screen or status information screen is
not displayed properly.
143
0In the pure direct playback mode, the menu screen or status information is not displayed. Switch to a
sound mode other than the pure direct mode.
143
0Set the “TV Format” setting in the menu to a selection that is appropriate for the TV. 205
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
290
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oiPod cannot be played back
Symptom Cause / Solution Page
iPod cannot be connected. 0When using iPod by connecting it to the USB port, some iPod variations are not supported. 69
0When iPod is connected by using a USB cable other than the genuine cable, iPod may not be
recognized. Use a genuine USB cable.
-
The AirPlay icon ' is not
displayed on iTunes /
iPhone / iPod touch / iPad.
0This unit and PC / iPhone / iPod touch / iPad are not connected to the same network (LAN). Connect it to
the same LAN as this unit.
73
0The firmware on iTunes / iPhone / iPod touch / iPad is not compatible with AirPlay. Update the firmware to
the latest version.
-
Audio is not output. 0The volume on iTunes / iPhone / iPod touch / iPad is set to the minimum level. The volume on iTunes /
iPhone / iPod touch / iPad is linked with the volume on this unit. Set a proper volume level.
-
0The AirPlay playback is not performed, or this unit is not selected. Click the AirPlay icon ' on the
iTunes / iPhone / iPod touch / iPad screen and select this unit.
128
Audio is interrupted during
the AirPlay playback on
iPhone / iPod touch / iPad.
0Quit the application running in the background of the iPhone/iPod touch/iPad, and then play using
AirPlay.
-
0Some external factors may be affecting the wireless connection. Modify the network environment by
taking measures such as shortening the distance from the wireless LAN access point.
-
iTunes cannot be played
back through the remote
control unit.
0Enable the “Allow iTunes audio control from remote speakers” setting on iTunes. Then, you can perform
playback, pause, and skip operations through the remote control unit.
-
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
291
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oUSB memory devices cannot be played back
Symptom Cause / Solution Page
“No connection” is
displayed.
0This unit cannot recognize the USB memory device. Disconnect and reconnect the USB memory device. 69
0Mass storage class compatible USB memory devices are supported. -
0This unit does not support a connection through a USB hub. Connect the USB memory device directly to
the USB port.
-
0The USB memory device must be formatted to FAT16 or FAT32. -
0Not all USB memory devices are guaranteed to work. Some USB memory devices are not recognized.
When using a type of portable hard disc drive compatible with the USB connection that requires power
from an AC adapter, use the AC adapter that came with the drive.
-
Files on the USB memory
device are not displayed.
0Files of a type not supported by this unit are not displayed. 86
0This unit is able to display files in a maximum of eight folder layers. A maximum of 5000 files (folders) can
also be displayed for each layer. Modify the folder structure of the USB memory device.
-
0When multiple partitions exist on the USB memory device, only files on the first partition are displayed. -
Files on a USB memory
device cannot be played.
0Files are created in a format that is not supported by this unit. Check the formats supported by this unit. 305
0You are attempting to play a file that is copyright protected. Files that are copyright protected cannot be
played on this unit.
-
0Playback may not be possible if the album art file size exceeds 2 MB. -
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
292
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oFile names on the iPod/USB memory device are not displayed properly
Symptom Cause / Solution Page
The file names are not
displayed properly (“...”,
etc.).
0Characters that cannot be displayed have been used. On this unit, characters that cannot be displayed
are replaced with a “. (period)”.
-
oBluetooth cannot be played back
Symptom Cause / Solution Page
Bluetooth devices cannot
be connected to this unit.
0The Bluetooth function in the Bluetooth device has not been enabled. See the Owner’s Manual of the
Bluetooth device to enable the Bluetooth function.
-
0Bring the Bluetooth device near to this unit. -
0The Bluetooth device cannot connect with this unit if it is not compatible with the A2DP profile. -
0Turn the power of the Bluetooth device off and on again, and then try again. -
The sound is cut off. 0Bring the Bluetooth device near to this unit. -
0Remove obstructions between the Bluetooth device and this unit. -
0To prevent electromagnetic interference, locate this unit away from microwave ovens, wireless LAN
devices and other Bluetooth devices.
-
0Reconnect the Bluetooth device. -
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
293
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oThe Internet radio cannot be played back
Symptom Cause / Solution Page
A list of broadcasting
stations is not displayed.
0The LAN cable is not properly connected, or the network is disconnected. Check the connection status. 73
0Perform the network diagnostic mode. -
Internet Radio cannot be
played.
0The selected radio station is broadcasting in a format that is not supported by this unit. Formats that can
be played back in this unit are MP3, WMA and AAC.
308
0The firewall function is enabled on the router. Check the firewall setting. -
0The IP address is not properly set. 250
0Check the power of the router is on. -
0To obtain the IP address automatically, enable the DHCP server function on the router. Also, set the
DHCP setting to “On” on this unit.
250
0To obtain the IP address manually, set the IP address and proxy on this unit. 250
0Some radio stations broadcast silently during some time period. In this case, no audio is output. Wait for a
while and select the same radio station, or select another radio station.
106
Cannot connect to favorite
radio stations.
0Radio station is not currently in service. Register radio stations in service. -
For some radio stations,
“Connection down” is
displayed and station
cannot be connected to.
0The selected radio station is not in service. Select a radio station in service. -
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
294
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oMusic files on PC or NAS cannot be played back
Symptom Cause / Solution Page
Files stored on a computer
cannot be played.
0Files are stored in a non-compatible format. Record in a compatible format. 307
0Files that are copyright protected cannot be played on this unit. -
0The set’s USB port cannot be used for connection to a computer. -
0Media sharing settings are not correct. Change media sharing settings so that the unit can access the
folders on your computer.
110
Server is not found, or it is
not possible to connect to
the server.
0The computer’s or router’s firewall is activated. Check the computer’s or router’s firewall settings. -
0Computer’s power is not turned on. Turn on the power. -
0Server is not running. Launch the server. -
0Set’s IP address is wrong. Check the set’s IP address. 247
Music files on PC cannot
be played back.
0Even if PC is connected to the USB port on this unit, music files on it cannot be played back. Connect PC
to this unit through the network.
73
Files on PC or NAS are not
displayed.
0Files of a type not supported by this unit are not displayed. 307
Music stored on a NAS
cannot be played.
0If you use a NAS in conformity with the DLNA standard, enable the DLNA server function in the NAS
setting.
-
0If you use a NAS that does not conform with the DLNA standard, play the music via a PC. Set Windows
Media Player’s media sharing function and add NAS to the selected play folder.
110
0If connection is restricted, set audio equipment as the connection target. -
oVarious online services cannot be played
Symptom Cause / Solution Page
Various online services
cannot be played.
0The online service may have been discontinued. -
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
295
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oThe HDMI control function does not work
Symptom Cause / Solution Page
The HDMI control function
does not work.
0Check that “HDMI Control” in the menu is set to “On”. 197
0You cannot operate devices that are not compatible with the HDMI control function. In addition,
depending on the connected device or the settings, the HDMI control function may not work. In this case,
operate the external device directly.
156
0Check that the HDMI control function setting is enabled on all devices connected to this unit. 156
0When you make connection related changes such as connecting an additional HDMI device, the link
operation settings may be initialized. Turn off this unit and devices connected via HDMI, and turn them on
again.
156
0The HDMI MONITOR 2 connector is not compatible with the HDMI control function. Use the HDMI
MONITOR 1 connector to connect to the TV.
60
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
296
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oCannot connect to a wireless LAN network
Symptom Cause / Solution Page
Cannot connect to the
network.
0The network name (SSID), password and encryption setting have not been set up correctly. Configure the
network settings according to the setting details of this unit.
249
0Shorten the distance from the wireless LAN access point and remove any obstructions to improve access
first before re-connecting again. Place the unit away from microwave ovens and other network access
points.
-
0Configure the access point channel settings away from channels that are being used by other networks. -
0This unit is not compatible with WEP (TSN). -
Cannot connect to WPS. 0Check that the WPS mode of the router is operating. -
0Press the WPS button on the router and then press the “Connect” button displayed on the TV within 2
minutes.
-
0A router/settings that are compatible with WPS 2.0 standards are required. Set the encryption time to
“None”, “WPA-PSK (AES)” or WPA2-PSK (AES).
249
0If the router encryption method is WEP/WPA-TKIP/WPA2-TKIP, you cannot connect by using the WPS
button. In this case, use the “Scan Networks” or “Manual” method to connect.
-
Cannot connect to the
network using iPhone/iPod
touch/iPad.
0Update the iPhone/iPod touch/iPad firmware to the latest version. -
0When using a USB cable to configure the settings, the iOS device firmware version needs to support iOS
5 or later. When configuring the settings via a wireless connection, iOS 7 or later needs to be supported.
-
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
297
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oWhen using HDMI ZONE2, the devices does not function properly
Symptom Cause / Solution Page
When using MAIN ZONE,
video output is interrupted
in HDMI ZONE2.
0With the same input source selected for MAIN ZONE and ZONE2, when you operate MAIN ZONE, video
may be interrupted in HDMI ZONE2.
-
When using HDMI ZONE2,
no video or audio is output
from the TV in ZONE2.
0Check that the power is on for ZONE2. 173
0Check the input source for ZONE2. 173
0The AUX1-HDMI connector on the front panel does not support the HDMI ZONE2 function. -
0In ZONE2, playback is only possible when the input signals are HDMI signals. -
0When the TV does not support the input audio format, audio is not output. Set the audio format to “PCM”
on the playback device. Alternatively, set “ZONE2 Setup” - “HDMI Audio” in the menu to “PCM”.
256
0When the TV is not compatible with the resolution of the input video, no video is output. Set the output
resolution on the playback device to a resolution that is compatible with the TV.
-
When using HDMI ZONE2,
MAIN ZONE audio is
played back as PCM.
0When the same input source is selected for MAIN ZONE and ZONE2, the audio format is limited
according to the specifications of the TV in ZONE2.
-
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
298
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Resetting factory settings
Perform this procedure if the display is abnormal or if operations cannot be performed.
Various settings are reset to the factory default values. Make settings again.
.
XGAME
A-DSX
1Turn off the power using X.
2Press X while simultaneously pressing GAME and A-
DSX.
3Remove your fingers from the two buttons when
“Initialized” appears on the display.
0Before restoring the default setting, the “Save” function of the web control function
can be used to store the various settings of the unit. (v p. 163)
However, account information for network content and information on registered
favorites cannot be stored.
0When deleting a Pandora account, carry out steps 1 to 3 after signing out in the
Pandora service. (v p. 123)
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
299
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

About HDMI
HDMI is an abbreviation of High-Definition Multimedia Interface, which is
an AV digital interface that can be connected to a TV or amplifier.
With the HDMI connection, high definition video and high quality audio
formats adopted by Blu-ray Disc players (Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby
TrueHD, DTS-HD, DTS-HD Master Audio) can be transmitted, which is not
possible with the analog video transmission.
Furthermore, in the HDMI connection, audio and video signals can be
transmitted through a single HDMI cable, while in conventional
connections it is necessary to provide audio and video cables separately
for connection between devices. This allows you to simplify the wiring
configuration that tends to be quite complex in a home theater system.
This unit supports the following HDMI functions.
0Deep Color
An imaging technology supported by HDMI. Unlike RGB or YCbCr,
which uses 8 bits (256 shades) per color, it can use 10 bits (1024
shades), 12 bits (4096 shades), or 16 bits (65536 shades) to produce
colors in higher definition.
Both devices linked via HDMI must support Deep Color.
0“x.v.Color”
This function lets HDTVs display colors more accurately. It enables
display with natural, vivid colors.
“x.v.Color” is trademark of Sony Corporation.
03D
This unit supports input and output of 3D (3 dimensional) video signals
of HDMI. To play back 3D video, you need a TV and player that
provide support for the HDMI 3D function and a pair of 3D glasses.
04K
This unit supports input and output of 4K (3840 x 2160 pixels) video
signals of HDMI.
0Content Type
It automatically makes settings suitable for the video output type
(content information).
0Adobe RGB color, Adobe YCC601 color
The color space defined by Adobe Systems Inc. Because it is a wider
color space than RGB, it can produce more vivid and natural images.
0sYCC601 color
Each of these color spaces defines a palette of available colors that is
larger than the traditional RGB color model.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
Appendix
300
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

0Auto Lip Sync
This function can automatically correct delay between the audio and
video.
Use a TV that is compatible with the Auto Lip Sync function.
0HDMI Pass Through
Even when the power to this unit is set to standby, signals input from
the HDMI input connector are output to a TV or other device that is
connected to the HDMI output connector.
0HDMI Control
If you connect the unit and an HDMI control function compatible TV or
player with an HDMI cable and then enable the HDMI control function
setting on each device, the devices will be able to control each other.
0Power off link
This unit power off can be linked to the TV power off step.
0Audio output destination switching
From the TV, you can switch whether to output audio from the TV or
the AV amplifier.
0Volume adjustment
You can adjust this unit’s volume in the TV volume adjustment
operation.
0Input source switching
You can switch this unit input sources through linkage to TV input
switching.
When playing the player, this unit input source switches to the
source for that player.
0ARC (Audio Return Channel)
This function transmits audio signals from the TV to this unit through
the HDMI cable and plays back the audio from the TV on this unit
based on the HDMI control function.
If a TV without the ARC function is connected via HDMI connections,
video signals of the playback device connected to this unit are
transmitted to the TV, but this unit can not play back the audio from the
TV. If you want to enjoy surround audio for TV program, a separate
audio cable connection is required.
In contrast, if a TV with the ARC function is connected via HDMI
connections, no audio cable connection is required. Audio signals from
the TV can be input to this unit through the HDMI cable between this
unit and the TV. This function allows you to enjoy surround playback
on this unit for the TV.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
301
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oSupported audio formats
2-channel Linear
PCM
2-channel, 32 kHz – 192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit
Multi-channel
Linear PCM
7.1-channel, 32 kHz – 192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit
Bitstream
Dolby Digital / DTS / Dolby Atmos / Dolby TrueHD /
Dolby Digital Plus / DTS-HD Master Audio / DTS-HD
High Resolution Audio / DTS Express
DSD 2-channel – 5.1-channel, 2.8224 MHz
oSupported video signals
0480i 0480p
0576i 0576p
0720p 60/50Hz 01080i 60/50Hz
01080p 60/50/24Hz 04K 60/50/30/25/24 Hz
Copyright protection system
In order to play back digital video and audio such as BD video or DVD
video via HDMI connection, both this unit and the TV or player must to
support the copyright protection system known as HDCP (High-
bandwidth Digital Content Protection System). HDCP is copyright
protection technology comprised of data encryption and authentication of
the connected AV devices. This unit supports HDCP.
0If a device that does not support HDCP is connected, video and audio
are not output correctly. Read the owner’s manual of your television or
player for more information.
When connecting this unit to a device that is compatible with the Deep Color, 4K and
ARC functions, use a “High Speed HDMI cable with Ethernet” that bears the HDMI
logo.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
302
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Video conversion function
This unit automatically converts the input video signals as shown in the diagram before outputting them to the TV.
The main zone video conversion
function is compatible with the following
formats: NTSC, PAL, SECAM,
NTSC4.43, PAL-N, PAL-M and PAL-60.
HDMI-compatible TV
Output
(MONITOR OUT)
Input (IN)
Video signal Video signal
Component video
signal
HDMI signal
Output
Video device This unit
HDMI-incompatible TV
HDMI signal
HDMI connector HDMI connector HDMI connector HDMI connector
Component video
signal
Component video
connectors
Component video
connectors
Component video
connectors
Component video
connectors
Video connector Video connector Video connector Video connector
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
303
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

This unit can convert the input video signals to the resolution that is set for “Resolution” in the menu before outputting them to the TV. (v p. 201)
Output signal
Input signal
HDMI
480i/576i 480p/576p 720p 1080i 1080p 1080p 24Hz 4K 30/25/24Hz 4K 60/50Hz
HDMI
480i/576i P P P P P P P P
480p/576p P P P P P P P
720p P P P P P P
1080i P P P P P P
1080p 24Hz P P P P
1080p P P P P
4K 30/25/24Hz P
4K 60/50Hz P z
Component Video
480i/576i P P P P P P P P
480p/576p P P P P P P P
720p P P P P P P
1080i P P P P P P
1080p P P P P
Video 480i/576i P P P P P P P P
zThe HDMI connector on the front panel is not compatible.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
304
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Playing back a USB memory devices
0This unit is compatible with MP3 ID3-Tag (Ver. 2) standard.
0This unit can show the artwork that was embedded by using MP3 ID3-Tag Ver. 2.3 or 2.4.
0This unit is compatible with WMA META tags.
0If the image size (pixels) of an album artwork exceeds 500 × 500 (WMA/MP3/WAV/FLAC) or 349 × 349 (MPEG-4 AAC), then music may not be played
back properly.
oCompatible formats
Sampling frequency Bit rate
Extension
WMAz132/44.1/48 kHz 48 – 192
kbps .wma
MP3 32/44.1/ 48 kHz 32 – 320
kbps .mp3
WAV 32/44.1/48/88.2/
96/176.4/192 kHz – .wav
MPEG-4 AACz132/44.1/48 kHz 16 – 320
kbps
.aac/
.m4a/
.mp4
FLAC 32/44.1/48/88.2/
96/176.4/192 kHz – .flac
ALACz232/44.1/48/88.2/
96 kHz – .m4a
DSD 2.8 MHz – .dsf/
.dff
AIFF 32/44.1/48/88.2/
96/176.4/192 kHz –.aif/
.aiff
z1Only files that are not protected by copyright can be played on this unit.
Content downloaded from pay sites on the Internet are copyright protected.
Also, files encoded in WMA format when ripped from a CD, etc. on a computer
may be copyright protected, depending on the computer’s settings.
z2Copyright [2012] [D&M Holdings. Inc.]
Licensed under the Apache License, Version 2.0 (the “License”); you may not
use this file except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of
the License at
http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0
In ZONE2, it is not possible to play the DSD signal.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
305
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oMaximum number of playable files and folder
The limits on the number of folders and files that can be displayed by
this unit are as follows.
Media
Item USB memory device
Memory capacity FAT16 : 2 GB, FAT32 : 2 TB
Number of folder directory levels z18 levels
Number of folders 500
Number of filesz25000
z1The limited number includes the root folder.
z2The allowable number of files may differ according to the USB memory device
capacity and the file size.
Playing back a Bluetooth device
This unit supports the following Bluetooth profile.
0A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Profile):
When a Bluetooth device that supports this standard is connected,
monaural and stereo sound data can be streamed at a high quality.
0AVRCP (Audio/Video Remote Control Profile):
When a Bluetooth device that supports this standard is connected, the
Bluetooth device can be operated from this unit.
oAbout Bluetooth communications
Radio waves broadcast from this unit may interfere with the operation
of medical devices. Make sure you turn off the power of this unit and
Bluetooth device in the following locations as radio wave interference
may cause malfunctions.
0Hospitals, trains, aircraft, petrol kiosks and places where flammable
gases are generated
0Near automatic doors and fire alarms
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
306
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Playing back a file saved on a PC or NAS
0This unit is compatible with MP3 ID3-Tag (Ver. 2) standard.
0This unit can show the artwork that was embedded by using MP3 ID3-Tag Ver. 2.3 or 2.4.
0This unit is compatible with WMA META tags.
0If the image size (pixels) of an album artwork exceeds 500 × 500 (WMA/MP3/WAV/FLAC) or 349 × 349 (MPEG-4 AAC), then music may not be played
back properly.
0A server or server software compatible with distribution in the corresponding formats is required to play music files via a network.
oSpecifications of supported files
Sampling frequency Bit rate
Extension
WMAz132/44.1/48 kHz 48 – 192
kbps .wma
MP3 32/44.1/ 48 kHz 32 – 320
kbps .mp3
WAV 32/44.1/48/88.2/
96/176.4/192 kHz – .wav
MPEG-4 AACz132/44.1/48 kHz 16 – 320
kbps
.aac/
.m4a/
.mp4
FLAC 32/44.1/48/88.2/
96/176.4/192 kHz – .flac
ALACz232/44.1/48/88.2/
96 kHz – .m4a
DSD 2.8 MHz – .dsf/
.dff
AIFF 32/44.1/48/88.2/
96/176.4/192 kHz –.aif/
.aiff
z1Only files that are not protected by copyright can be played on this unit.
Content downloaded from pay sites on the Internet are copyright protected.
Also, files encoded in WMA format when ripped from a CD, etc. on a computer
may be copyright protected, depending on the computer’s settings.
z2Copyright [2012] [D&M Holdings. Inc.]
Licensed under the Apache License, Version 2.0 (the “License”); you may not
use this file except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of
the License at
http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0
In ZONE2, it is not possible to play the DSD signal.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
307
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Playing back Internet Radio
oPlayable broadcast station specifications
Sampling frequency Bit rate
Extension
WMA 32/44.1/48 kHz 48 – 192
kbps .wma
MP3 32/44.1/ 48 kHz 32 – 320
kbps .mp3
MPEG-4 AAC 32/44.1/48 kHz 16 – 320
kbps
.aac/
.m4a/
.mp4
Personal memory plus function
The most recently used settings (input mode, HDMI output mode, sound
mode, tone control, channel level, MultEQ® XT32, Dynamic EQ, Dynamic
Volume, M-DAX and audio delay, etc.) are saved for each input source.
“Surround Parameter” settings are stored for each sound mode.
Last function memory
This function stores the settings which were made before going into the
standby mode.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
308
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Sound modes and channel output
S This indicates the audio output channels or surround parameters that can be set.
D This indicates the audio output channels. The output channels depend on the settings of “Speaker Config.” (v p. 236).
.
Sound mode
Channel output
Front L/R Center Surround
L/R
Surround
back L/R
Front wide
L/R
Front
height L/R
Top Front
L/R
Top
Middle L/R
Top Rear
L/R
Rear
Height L/R
Front
Dolby
Enabled
L/R
Surround
Dolby
Enabled
L/R
Back
Dolby
Enabled
L/R
Subwoofer
Direct/Pure Direct (2-channel) SDz7
Direct/Pure Direct (Multi-channel) SDD
Dz3Dz3Dz3D
DSD Direct (2-channel) SDz7
DSD Direct (Multi-channel) SDD D
Stereo S D
Multi Ch In SDD
Dz3D
Dolby Surround SDD
Dz4DDDDDDDDD
DTS Neo:X SDDDDD D
Audyssey DSX®SDD Dz6Dz6D
Dolby Digital SDD D
Dolby Digital Plus SDD
Dz3Dz3Dz3D
Dolby TrueHD SDD
Dz3Dz3Dz3D
Dolby Atmos SDDDDDDDDDDDDD
DTS Surround SDDD D
DTS 96/24 SDDD D
DTS-HD SDD
Dz3Dz3Dz3D
DTS Express SDDD D
Multi Ch Stereo SDDDDDDDDD D
z1
z2z5z5z5
z5z5z5z5z5z5z5
Virtual S D
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
309
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

z1The applicable sound mode includes “Dolby Surround” and sound modes that have “+Dolby Surround” in the sound mode name.
z2The applicable sound mode includes “DTS Neo:X” and sound modes that have “+Neo:X” in the sound mode name.
z3A signal for each channel contained in an input signal is output as audio.
z4 Audio is not output when “Speaker Config.” - “Surr. Back” in the menu is set to “1 spkr”. (v p. 237)
z5 Audio is output from the speakers specified in the “Surround Parameter” – “Speaker Select” settings. (v p. 184)
z6Audio is output from the speakers specified in the “Audyssey DSX®” settings. (v p. 190)
z7 Audio is output when “Subwoofer Mode” in the menu is set to “LFE+Main”. (v p. 243)
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
310
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Sound modes and surround parameters
.
Sound mode
Surround Parameter
Dialog
Level
Adjust
Subwoofer
Level
Adjust
Cinema EQ Loudness
Management
z1z2
Dynamic
Compression
z3
Low
Frequency
Effects
Speaker
Select
Center Gain
Direct/Pure Direct (2-channel) z4
Direct/Pure Direct (Multi-channel) z4
DSD Direct (2-channel)
DSD Direct (Multi-channel) z4
Stereo
Multi Ch In
Dolby Surround
DTS Neo:X
Audyssey DSX®
Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital Plus
Dolby TrueHD
Dolby Atmos
DTS Surround
DTS 96/24
DTS-HD
DTS Express
Multi Ch Stereo
Virtual
Sz5
Sz5
SSS
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
SS
S
S
S
S
S
SSS
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
SS
S
z1 - z5 : “Sound modes and surround parameters” (v p. 313)
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
311
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

.
Sound mode
Surround Parameter
Dialog
Enhancer
MultEQ XT32 Dynamic EQ
z8z8
Dynamic
Volume
Audyssey
LFC
z6z7z8z9
Tone Audyssey
DSX
M-DAX
Direct/Pure Direct (2-channel) z4
Direct/Pure Direct (Multi-channel) z4
DSD Direct (2-channel)
DSD Direct (Multi-channel) z4
Stereo
Multi Ch In
Dolby Surround
DTS Neo:X
Audyssey DSX®
Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital Plus
Dolby TrueHD
Dolby Atmos
DTS Surround
DTS 96/24
DTS-HD
DTS Express
Multi Ch Stereo
Virtual
SSS S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
SSS
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
SSS
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
SS
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
SS
S
S
SS
SS
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
®
TM ®
z4, z6 - z9 : “Sound modes and surround parameters” (v p. 313)
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
312
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

z1This item can be selected when the Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD or Dolby Atmos signal is played back.
z2This item can be selected when the Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Atmos or DTS is played back.
z3This item can be selected when a Dolby Digital or DTS signal or DVD-Audio is played.
z4During playback in Pure Direct mode, the surround parameters are the same as in Direct mode.
z5 This setting is available when “Subwoofer Mode” in the menu is set to “LFE+Main”. (v p. 243)
z6 This item cannot be set when “Dynamic EQ” is set to “On”. (v p. 188)
z7This item cannot be set when Audyssey® Setup (Speaker Calibration) has not been performed.
z8This item cannot be set when “MultEQ® XT32” in the menu is set to “Off”. (v p. 187)
z9This item can be set when the input signal is analog, PCM 48 kHz or 44.1 kHz.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
313
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Types of input signals, and corresponding sound modes
F This indicates the default sound mode.
S This indicates the selectable sound mode.
.
Sound mode
NOTE
2-channel signal Multi-channel signal
Analog /
PCM
Dolby
Digital
(+/HD)
DTS
(-HD)
DSD
(Super
Audio
CD)
PCM
Multi
DTS-HD
DTS
Express
DTS ES
Dscrt6.1
DTS ES
Mtrx6.1
DTS Dolby
Atmos
Dolby
TrueHD
Dolby
Digital
Plus
Dolby
Digital
(EX)
DSD
(Super
Audio
CD)
DTS Surround
DTS-HD MSTR Fz3
DTS-HD HI RES Fz4
DTS ES Dscrt6.1 z1F
DTS ES Mtrx6.1 z1F
DTS Surround SSF
DTS 96/24 Fz5
DTS(-HD) + Dolby Surround SSSSS
DTS Express F
DTS(-HD) + Neo:X z2SSSSS
DTS Neo:X SSFS
Dolby Surround
Dolby Atmos F
Dolby TrueHD Sz6S
Dolby Digital+ Sz7S
Dolby(D+)(HD) + Dolby Surround FFF
Dolby Digital S
Dolby(D)(D+)(HD) + Neo:X z2Sz8SSS
Dolby Surround SFSS
z1 - z8: “Types of input signals, and corresponding sound modes” (v p. 316)
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
314
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

.
Sound mode NOTE
2-channel signal Multi-channel signal
Analog /
PCM
Dolby
Digital
(+/HD)
DTS
(-HD)
DSD
(Super
Audio
CD)
PCM
Multi
DTS-HD
DTS
Express
DTS ES
Dscrt6.1
DTS ES
Mtrx6.1
DTS Dolby
Atmos
Dolby
TrueHD
Dolby
Digital
Plus
Dolby
Digital
(EX)
DSD
(Super
Audio
CD)
Multi Ch In
Multi Ch In F F
Multi Ch In + Dolby Surround S S
Multi Ch In + Neo:X z2S S
Multi Ch In 7.1 z1Fz10
Audyssey
Audyssey DSX®SSSSSS
Sz8SSSS
Direct
Direct Sz9SS SSSSSSSSSS
DSD Direct S S
Pure Direct
Pure Direct SSS SSSSSSSSSS
DSD Pure Direct S S
Original sound mode
Multi Ch Stereo SSSSSSSSSSSSSSS
Rock Arena SSSSSSSSSS
Sz8SSSS
Jazz Club SSSSSSSSSS
Sz8SSSS
Mono Movie SSSSSSSSSS
Sz8SSSS
Video Game SSSSSSSSSS
Sz8SSSS
Matrix SSSSSSSSSS
Sz8SSSS
Virtual SSSSSSSSSS
Sz8SSSS
Stereo
Stereo FSSFSSSSSSSSSSS
z1 - z2, z8 - z10 : “Types of input signals, and corresponding sound modes” (v p. 316)
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
315
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

z1This item can be selected when surround back speakers are used.
z2The “Cinema” mode, “Music” mode or “Game” mode can be selected. This item can be selected when using any of the surround back, front height or front wide speaker.
z3This item can be selected when the input signal is DTS-HD Master Audio.
z4This item can be selected when the input signal is DTS-HD Hi Resolution.
z5This item can be selected when the input signal is DTS 96/24.
z6This can be selected when the Dolby Atmos signal contains the Dolby TrueHD signal.
z7This can be selected when the Dolby Atmos signal contains the Dolby Digital Plus signal.
z8This can be selected when the Dolby Atmos signal contains the Dolby TrueHD or Dolby Digital Plus signal.
z9The default sound mode for the AirPlay playback is “Direct”.
z10 This item can be selected when the input signals contain surround back signals.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
316
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Explanation of terms
oAudyssey
Audyssey Dynamic EQ®
Dynamic EQ solves the problem of deteriorating sound quality as volume
is decreased by taking into account human perception and room
acoustics.
Audyssey Dynamic EQ® works in tandem with Audyssey MultEQ® XT32
to provide well-balanced sound for every listener at any volume level.
Audyssey Dynamic Surround Expansion (A-DSX)
Audyssey DSX® is a new surround enhancement technology that raises
the surround effect and impression to realize a larger surround space by
adding a new channel to the existing 5.1 channel system.
In research on human hearing characteristics, two points can be broadly
cited as elements that enhance the surround effect. The most important
point is the creation of horizontal spread (wide channel) at the front
(forward) area in composing a realistic surround space. The next
important point is the creation of vertical spread (height channel) in the
front (forward) area using recognizable (audible) acoustic signals so as to
create a surround space with depth.
Audyssey DSX® then creates a pair of Height channels to reproduce the
next most important acoustical and perceptual cues. In addition, Audyssey
DSX® does not simply add a channel but combines the existing front,
surround and rear surround sound to develop a technology known as
“Surround Envelopment Processing” which has been incorporated into
Audyssey DSX® to further enhance the effect.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
317
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Audyssey Dynamic Volume®
Dynamic Volume solves the problem of large variations in volume level
between television programs, commercials, and between the soft and loud
passages of movies. Audyssey Dynamic EQ® is integrated into Dynamic
Volume so that as the playback volume is adjusted automatically, the
perceived bass response, tonal balance, surround impression, and dialog
clarity remain the same.
Audyssey LFC™ (Low Frequency Containment)
Audyssey LFC™ solves the problem of low frequency sounds disturbing
people in neighboring rooms or apartments. Audyssey LFC™ dynamically
monitors the audio content and removes the low frequencies that pass
through walls, floors and ceilings. It then applies psychoacoustic
processing to restore the perception of low bass for listeners in the room.
The result is great sound that no longer disturbs the neighbors.
Audyssey MultEQ® XT32
Audyssey MultEQ® XT32 is a room equalization solution that calibrates
any audio system so that it can achieve optimum performance for every
listener in a large listening area. Based on several room measurements,
MultEQ® XT32 calculates an equalization solution that corrects for both
time and frequency response problems in the listening area and also
performs a fully automated surround system setup.
oDolby
Dolby Atmos
Introduced first in the cinema, Dolby Atmos brings a revolutionary sense of
dimension and immersion to the Home Theater experience. Dolby Atmos
is an adaptable and scalable object based format that reproduces audio
as independent sounds (or objects) that can be accurately positioned and
move dynamically throughout the 3 dimensional listening space during
playback. A key ingredient of Dolby Atmos is the introduction of a height
plane of sound above the listener.
Dolby Atmos Stream
Dolby Atmos content will be delivered to your Dolby Atmos enabled AV
receiver via Dolby Digital Plus or Dolby TrueHD on Blu-ray Disc,
downloadable files and streaming media. A Dolby Atmos stream contains
special metadata that describes the positioning of sounds within the room.
This object audio data is decoded by a Dolby Atmos AV receiver and
scaled for optimum playback through Home Theater speaker systems of
every size and configuration.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
318
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital is a multi-channel digital signal format developed by Dolby
Laboratories.
A total of 5.1-channels are played: 3 front channels (“FL”, “FR” and “C”), 2
surround channels (“SL” and “SR”) and the “LFE” channel for low
frequency effects.
Because of this, there is no crosstalk between channels and a realistic
sound field with a “three-dimensional” feeling (sense of distance,
movement and positioning) is achieved. This delivers a thrilling surround
sound experience in the home.
Dolby Digital Plus
Dolby Digital Plus is an improved Dolby Digital signal format that is
compatible with up to 7.1-channels of discrete digital sound and also
improves sound quality thanks to extra data bit rate performance. It is
upwardly compatible with conventional Dolby Digital, so it offers greater
flexibility in response to the source signal and the conditions of the
playback device.
Dolby Surround
Dolby surround is a next generation surround technology that intelligently
up mixes stereo; 5.1 and 7.1 content for playback through your surround
speaker system. Dolby surround is compatible with traditional speaker
layouts, as well as Dolby Atmos enabled playback systems that employ in-
ceiling speakers or products with Dolby speaker technology.
Dolby Speaker Technology (Dolby Enabled Speakers)
A convenient alternative to speakers built into the ceiling, products utilizing
Dolby speaker technology employ the ceiling above you as a reflective
surface for reproducing audio in the height plane above the listener. Dolby
enabled speakers feature a unique upward firing driver and special signal
processing that can be built into a conventional speaker, or a standalone
speaker module, minimally impacting the overall speaker system footprint
while providing an immersive listening experience during Dolby Atmos and
Dolby surround playback.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
319
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Dolby TrueHD
Dolby TrueHD is a high definition audio technology developed by Dolby
Laboratories, using lossless coding technology to faithfully reproduce the
sound of the studio master.
This format provides the facility to support up to 8 audio channels with a
sampling frequency of 96 kHz/24 bit resolution and up to 6 audio channels
with a sampling frequency of 192 kHz/24 bit resolution.
oDTS
DTS
This is an abbreviation of Digital Theater System, which is a digital audio
system developed by DTS. DTS delivers a powerful and dynamic
surround sound experience, and is found in the world’s finest movie
theaters and screening rooms.
DTS 96/24
DTS 96/24 is a digital audio format enabling high sound quality playback in
5.1-channels with a sampling frequency of 96 kHz and 24 bit quantization
on DVD-Video.
DTS Digital Surround
DTS™ Digital Surround is the standard digital surround format of DTS,
Inc., compatible with a sampling frequency of 44.1 or 48 kHz and up to
5.1-channels of digital discrete surround sound.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
320
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

DTS-ES™ Discrete 6.1
DTS-ES™ Discrete 6.1 is a 6.1-channel discrete digital audio format
adding a surround back (SB) channel to the DTS digital surround sound.
Decoding of conventional 5.1-channel audio signals is also possible
according to the decoder.
DTS-ES™ Matrix 6.1
DTS-ES™ Matrix 6.1 is a 6.1-channel audio format that inserts a surround
back (SB) channel to the DTS digital surround sound through matrix
encoding. Decoding of conventional 5.1-channel audio signals is also
possible according to the decoder.
DTS Express
DTS Express is an audio format supporting low bit rates (max. 5.1-
channels, 24 to 256 kbps).
DTS-HD
This audio technology provides higher sound quality and enhanced
functionality than the conventional DTS and is adopted as an optional
audio for Blu-ray Disc.
This technology supports multi-channel, high data transfer speed, high
sampling frequency, and lossless audio playback. Maximum 7.1-channels
are supported in Blu-ray Disc.
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is an improved version of the conventional
DTS, DTS-ES and DTS 96/24 signals formats, compatible with sampling
frequencies of 96 or 48 kHz and up to 7.1-channels of discrete digital
sound. High data bit rate performance provides high quality sound. This
format is fully compatible with conventional products, including
conventional DTS digital surround 5.1-channel data.
DTS-HD Master Audio
DTS-HD Master Audio is a lossless audio format created by Digital
Theater System (DTS). This format provides the facility to support up to 8
audio channels with a sampling frequency of 96 kHz/24 bit resolution and
up to 6 audio channels with a sampling frequency of 192 kHz/24 bit
resolution. It is fully compatible with conventional products, including
conventional DTS digital surround 5.1-channel data.
DTS Neo:X
This matrix decoding technology uses the DTS Neo:X decoder to
playback 2-channel source or 5.1/6.1/7.1-channel surround sources as a
maximum of 11.1-channel surround sound. There are 3 modes: “Music”
suited for playing music, “Cinema” suited for playing movies, and “Game”
which is optimized for playing games.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
321
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oAudio
ALAC (Apple Lossless Audio Codec)
This is a codec for lossless audio compression method developed by
Apple Inc. This codec can be played back on iTunes, iPod or iPhone. Data
compressed to approximately 60 – 70 % can be decompressed to exactly
the same original data.
FLAC (Free Lossless Audio Codec)
FLAC stands for Free lossless Audio Codec, and is a lossless free audio
file format. Lossless means that the audio is compressed without any loss
in quality.
The FLAC license is as shown below.
Copyright (C) 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008,
2009 Josh Coalson
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
0Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
0Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
0Neither the name of the Xiph.org Foundation nor the names of its
contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from
this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND
CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
FOUNDATION OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF
USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE
OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
LFE
This is an abbreviation of Low Frequency Effect, which is an output
channel that emphasizes low frequency effect sound. Surround audio is
intensified by outputting 20 Hz to 120 Hz deep bass to the system
subwoofer(s).
MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer-3)
This is an internationally standardized audio data compression scheme,
using the “MPEG-1” video compression standard. It compresses the data
volume to about one eleventh its original size while maintaining sound
quality equivalent to a music CD.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
322
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

MPEG (Moving Picture Experts Group), MPEG-2, MPEG-4
These are the names for digital compression format standards used for
the encoding of video and audio. Video standards include “MPEG-1
Video”, “MPEG-2 Video”, “MPEG-4 Visual”, “MPEG-4 AVC”. Audio
standards include “MPEG-1 Audio”, “MPEG-2 Audio”, “MPEG-4 AAC”.
WMA (Windows Media Audio)
This is audio compression technology developed by Microsoft
Corporation.
WMA data can be encoded using Windows Media® Player.
To encode WMA files, only use applications authorized by Microsoft
Corporation. If you use an unauthorized application, the file may not work
properly.
Sampling frequency
Sampling involves taking a reading of a sound wave (analog signal) at
regular intervals and expressing the height of the wave at each reading in
digitized format (producing a digital signal).
The number of readings taken in one second is called the “sampling
frequency”. The larger the value, the closer the reproduced sound is to the
original.
Speaker impedance
This is an AC resistance value, indicated in Ω (Ohms).
Greater power can be obtained when this value is smaller.
Dialog normalization function
This function operates automatically during playback of Dolby Digital,
Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Atmos, DTS or DTS-HD sources.
It automatically corrects the standard signal level for individual program
sources.
Dynamic range
The difference between the maximum undistorted sound level and the
minimum discernible level above the noise emitted by the device.
Downmix
This function converts the number of channels of surround audio to a
lower number of channels and plays back according to the system’s
configuration.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
323
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oVideo
ISF
ISF (Imaging Science Foundation) is an organization that certifies video
technicians who are then qualified to carry out calibration and adjustment
to match the installation conditions. It also sets quality standards for the
optimization of device video performance.
Progressive (sequential scanning)
This is a scanning system of the video signal that displays 1 frame of video
as one image. Compared to the interlace system, this system provides
images with less flickering and jagged edges.
oNetwork
AES (Advanced Encryption Standard)
This is a next generation standard encryption method replacing the current
DES and 3DES, and because of its high security it is expected to be
applied widely to wireless LANs in the future. It uses the “Rijndael”
algorithm developed by two Belgian cryptographers to divide the data into
blocks of fixed lengths and encrypt each block. It supports data lengths of
128, 192 and 256 bits and key lengths of 128, 192 and 256 bits as well,
offering extremely high encryption security.
AirPlay
AirPlay sends (plays) contents recorded in iTunes or on an iPhone/iPod
touch/iPad to a compatible device via the network.
DLNA
DLNA and DLNA CERTIFIED are trademarks and/or service marks of
Digital Living Network Alliance. Some contents may not be compatible
with other DLNA CERTIFIED® products.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
324
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

TKIP (Temporal Key Integrity Protocol)
This is a network key used for WPA. The encryption algorithm is RC4, the
same as for WEP, but the security level is increased by changing the
network key used for encryption for each packet.
vTuner
This is a free online content server for Internet Radio.
For inquiries about this service, visit the vTuner site below.
vTuner website:
http://www.radiomarantz.com
This product is protected by certain intellectual property rights of Nothing
Else Matters Software and BridgeCo. Use or distribution of such
technology outside of this product is prohibited without a license from
Nothing Else Matters Software and BridgeCo or an authorized subsidiary.
WEP Key (network key)
This is key information used for encrypting data when conducting data
transfer. On this unit, the same WEP key is used for data encryption and
decryption, so the same WEP key must be set on both devices in order for
communications to be established between them.
Wi-Fi®
Wi-Fi Certification assures tested and proven interoperability by the Wi-Fi
Alliance, a group certifying interoperability among wireless LAN devices.
WPA (Wi-Fi Protected Access)
This is a security standard established by the Wi-Fi Alliance. In addition to
the conventional SSID (network name) and WEP key (network key), it also
uses a user identification function and encrypting protocol for stronger
security.
WPA2 (Wi-Fi Protected Access 2)
This is a new version of the WPA established by the Wi-Fi Alliance,
compatible with more secure AES encryption.
WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK (Pre-shared Key)
This is a simple authentication system for mutual authentication when a
preset character string matches on the wireless LAN access point and
client.
WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup)
This is a standard drawn up by the Wi-Fi Alliance to ease the task of
setting up wireless LAN connections and configuring security. There are
two methods: push-button and PIN (Personal Identification Number) code.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
325
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Network Names (SSID: Security Set Identifier)
When forming wireless LAN networks, groups are formed to prevent
interference, data theft, etc. These groups are based on “SSID (network
names)”. For enhanced security, a WEP key is set so that communication
is unavailable unless both the “SSID” and the WEP key match. This is
suitable for temporarily constructing a simplified network.
Modem
Device that connects to your broadband internet provider, and is very
often supplied with the service. A type that is integrated with a router is
also often available.
oMedia player
iTunes
iTunes is the name of the multimedia player provided by Apple Inc.
iTunes is the name of the multimedia player provided by Apple Inc. It
enables management and playback of multimedia contents including
music and movies. iTunes supports many main file formats including AAC,
WAV, and MP3.
Windows Media Player
This is a media player distributed free of charge by Microsoft Corporation.
It can play playlists created with Ver.11 or later of Windows Media Player,
as well as WMA, WAV, and other files.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
326
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oOthers
App Store
App Store is a site that sells application software for such devices as the
iPhone or iPod Touch, and is operated by Apple Inc.
HDCP
When transmitting digital signals between devices, this copyright
protection technology encrypts the signals to prevent content from being
copied without authorization.
MAIN ZONE
The room where this unit is placed is called the MAIN ZONE.
ZONE2
This unit can operate in a room other than the room where this unit is
placed (MAIN ZONE) (ZONE2 playback). The room for ZONE2 playback
is called ZONE2.
ZONE3
This unit can operate in a room other than the room where this unit is
placed (MAIN ZONE) (ZONE3 playback). The room for ZONE3 playback
is called ZONE3.
Pairing
Pairing (registration) is an operation that is required in order to connect a
Bluetooth device to this unit using Bluetooth. When paired, the devices
authenticate each other and can connect without mistaken connections
occurring.
When using Bluetooth connection for the first time, you need to pair this
unit and the Bluetooth device to be connected.
This unit can store pairing information for a maximum of 8 devices.
Protection circuit
This is a function to prevent damage to devices within the power supply
when an abnormality such as an overload, excess voltage occurs or over
temperature for any reason.
If a malfunction occurs in this unit, the power indicator blinks red and the
unit switches to standby mode.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
327
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Trademark information
.
“Made for iPod” and “Made for iPhone” mean that an electronic accessory
has been designed to connect specifically to iPod, or iPhone,
respectively, and has been certified by the developer to meet Apple
performance standards.
Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance
with safety and regulatory standards. Please note that the use of this
accessory with iPod, or iPhone, may affect wireless performance.
AirPlay, the AirPlay logo, iPad, iPhone, iPod, iPod classic, iPod nano,
iPod shuffle and iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in
the U.S. and other countries.
0Individual users are permitted to use iPhone, iPod, iPod classic, iPod
nano, iPod shuffle, and iPod touch for private copy and playback of
non-copyrighted contents and contents whose copy and playback is
permitted by law. Copyright infringement is prohibited by law.
.
Manufactured under license from Audyssey Laboratories™. U.S. and
foreign patents pending. Audyssey MultEQ® XT32, Audyssey Dynamic
EQ®, Audyssey Dynamic Volume®, Audyssey DSX® and Audyssey
LFC™ are registered trademarks of Audyssey Laboratories.
.
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned
by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by D&M Holdings Inc.
is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their
respective owners.
.
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Dolby
Atmos, Dolby Surround, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of
Dolby Laboratories.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
328
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

.
For DTS patents, see http://patents.dts.com. Manufactured under license
from DTS Licensing Limited. DTS, DTS-HD, the Symbol, & DTS and the
Symbol together are registered trademarks, and DTS-HD Master Audio
and DTS Neo:X | 11.1 are a trademark of DTS, Inc. © DTS, Inc. All Rights
Reserved.
.
The terms HDMI and HDMI High-Definition Multimedia Interface, and the
HDMI Logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing
LLC in the United States and other countries.
This item incorporates copy protection technology that is protected by
U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights of Rovi Corporation.
Reverse engineering and disassembly are prohibited.
.
The Wi-Fi CERTIFIED logo is a registered trademark of the Wi-Fi
Alliance.
Wi-Fi Certification provides assurance that the device has passed the
interoperability test conducted by the Wi-Fi Alliance, a group that certifies
interoperability among wireless LAN devices.
.
Adobe, the Adobe logo and Reader are either registered trademarks or
trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or
other countries.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
329
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Specifications
oAudio section
0Power amplifier
Rated output: Front:
125 W + 125 W (8 Ω/ohms, 20 Hz – 20 kHz with 0.05 % T.H.D.)
165 W + 165 W (6 Ω/ohms, 1 kHz with 0.7 % T.H.D.)
Center:
125 W (8 Ω/ohms, 20 Hz – 20 kHz with 0.05% T.H.D.)
165 W (6 Ω/ohms, 1 kHz with 0.7 % T.H.D.)
Surround:
125 W + 125 W (8 Ω/ohms, 20 Hz – 20 kHz with 0.05 % T.H.D.)
165 W + 165 W (6 Ω/ohms, 1 kHz with 0.7 % T.H.D.)
Surround back / Height1 / Front wide/Height2:
125 W + 125 W (8 Ω/ohms, 20 Hz – 20 kHz with 0.05 % T.H.D.)
165 W + 165 W (6 Ω/ohms, 1 kHz with 0.7 % T.H.D.)
Output connectors: 4 – 16 Ω/ohms
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
330
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

0Analog
Input sensitivity/Input impedance: 200 mV/47 kΩ/kohms
Frequency response: 10 Hz – 100 kHz — +1, –3 dB (Direct mode)
S/N: 100 dB (IHF–A weighted, Direct mode)
Distortion: 0.005 % (20 Hz – 20 kHz) (Direct mode)
Rated output: 1.2 V
0Digital
D/A output: Rated output — 2 V (at 0 dB playback)
Total harmonic distortion — 0.008 % (1 kHz, at 0 dB)
S/N ratio — 102 dB
Dynamic range — 100 dB
Digital input: Format — Digital audio interface
0Phono equalizer
Input sensitivity: 2.5 mV
RIAA deviation: ±1 dB (20 Hz to 20 kHz)
S/N: 74 dB (IHF-A)
Rated output: 150 mV
Distortion factor: 0.03 % (1 kHz, 3 V)
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
331
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oVideo section
0Standard video connectors
Input/output level and impedance: 1 Vp-p, 75 Ω/ohms
Frequency response: 5 Hz – 10 MHz — 0, –3 dB
0Color component video connector
Input/output level and impedance: Y signal — 1 Vp-p, 75 Ω/ohms
PB / CB signal — 0.7 Vp-p, 75 Ω/ohms
PR / CR signal — 0.7 Vp-p, 75 Ω/ohms
Frequency response: 5 Hz – 60 MHz — 0, –3 dB
oTuner section [FM] [AM]
(Note: μV at 75 Ω/ohms, 0 dBf = 1 x 10 –15 W)
Reception frequency range: 87.50 MHz – 107.90 MHz 530 kHz – 1710 kHz
Effective sensitivity: 1.5 μV (14.8 dBf) 20 μV
S/N ratio (IHF-A): Mono: 78 dB
Stereo: 68 dB
HD: 85 dB 85 dB
Distortion (1 kHz): MONO ― 0.1 %
STEREO ― 0.2 %
HD: 0.02 % 0.02 %
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
332
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oWireless LAN section
Network type (wireless LAN standard): Conforming to Wi-Fi®z1
Security: WEP 64 bit, WEP 128 bit
WPA/WPA2-PSK (AES)
WPA/WPA2-PSK (TKIP)
Radio frequency: 2.4 GHz
No. of channels: 1 – 11 ch
z1The Wi-Fi® CERTIFIED Logo and the Wi-Fi CERTIFIED On-Product Logo are registered trademarks of the Wi-Fi Alliance.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
333
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oBluetooth section
Communications system: Bluetooth Version 2.1 + EDR (Enhanced Data Rate)
Transmission power: Maximum 2.5 mW (Class 2)
Maximum communication range: Approx. 32.8 ft/10 m in line of sightz2
Frequency band: 2.4 GHz band
Modulation scheme: FHSS (Frequency-Hopping Spread Spectrum)
Supported profiles: A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Profile) 1.2
AVRCP (Audio Video Remote Control Profile) 1.4
Corresponding codec: SBC, AAC
Transmission range (A2DP): 20 Hz - 20,000 Hz
z2The actual communication range varies depending on the influence of such factors as obstructions between devices, electromagnetic waves from
microwave ovens, static electricity, cordless phones, reception sensitivity, antenna performance, operating system, application software etc.
oGeneral
Power supply: AC 120 V, 60 Hz
Power consumption: 710 W
Power consumption in standby mode: 0.2 W
Power consumption in CEC standby
mode: 0.5 W
Power consumption in network standby
mode: 2.7 W
For purposes of improvement, specifications and design are subject to change without notice.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
334
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oDimensions (Unit : in. (mm))
.
17 21/64 (440)
10 33/64 (267)
2 3/32
(53)
2 7/16
(62)
35/64
(14)
6 47/64 (171)
7 9/32 (185)
9 23/32 (247)
14 7/32 (361)
16 3/16 (411)
45/64
(18)
25/32
(20)
1 17/64
(32)
13 25/64 (340)
2 23/64
(60)
1 31/32 (50) 1 31/32 (50)
oWeight: 30 lbs 7oz (13.8 kg)
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
335
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Index
v Numerics
11.1-channel ............................................ 47, 56
3D ................................................................ 300
4K ................................................................ 300
5.1-channel .................................. 37, 44, 53, 54
7.1-channel .................................. 36, 45, 50, 51
9.1-channel .............................................. 46, 49
v A
Accessories ..................................................... 8
Add New Feature ......................................... 263
Adjusting the volume ...................................... 80
Adjusting volume of each channel ................ 137
AirPlay .......................................................... 127
All Zone Stereo ............................................ 141
Audio formats ....................... 302, 305, 307, 308
Audio settings ....................................... 175, 181
Audyssey DSX® .......................................... 317
Audyssey Dynamic EQ® ............................. 317
Audyssey Dynamic Volume® ...................... 318
Audyssey MultEQ® XT32 ............................ 318
Audyssey settings ................................ 187, 212
Audyssey® Setup ........................................ 210
Auto Standby ............................................... 255
v B
Bi-amp connection ......................................... 48
v C
Cables ............................................................ 31
Connecting a Blu-ray Disc player ................... 65
Connecting a cable TV ................................... 64
Connecting a DVD player ............................... 65
Connecting a game console ........................... 66
Connecting a satellite tuner ............................ 64
Connecting a set-top box ............................... 64
Connecting a TV ................................. 60, 61, 62
Connecting a video camera ........................... 66
Connecting an external control device ........... 75
Connecting an iPod ........................................ 69
Connecting an USB memory device .............. 69
Connecting HD Radio receiver ....................... 71
Connecting a power cord ............................... 77
Connecting to a home network (LAN) ............ 73
Connecting ZONE2/ZONE3 ................... 52, 168
v D
Direct sound mode ....................................... 150
Display ........................................................... 20
DLNA ........................................................... 324
Dolby Atmos ................................................. 318
Dolby sound mode ............................... 146, 319
DTS sound mode ................................. 147, 320
v E
ECO Mode ................................................... 254
Error messages (Audyssey® Setup) ............ 218
Explanation of terms/technology .......... 300, 317
v F
Firmware Update .......................................... 262
Front panel ..................................................... 15
v G
General settings ................................... 177, 254
v H
HD Radio playback ........................................ 94
HDCP ........................................................... 302
HDMI Control ....................................... 156, 197
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
336
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

v I
Input Assign ................................................. 206
Input signal ................................................... 314
Input source settings ............................ 176, 206
Inputting characters ...................................... 179
Inserting the batteries ....................................... 9
iPod Browse Mode ......................................... 83
iTunes .......................................................... 326
v J
JPEG ...................................................... 86, 109
v L
Listening position ......................................... 210
Listening to Spotify ....................................... 130
v M
M-DAX ......................................................... 185
Menu map .................................................... 175
v N
Network settings ................................... 247, 247
v O
Original sound mode .................................... 149
v P
Pairing a Bluetooth device ........................ 90, 93
PCM multi-channel sound mode .................. 148
Picture Mode ................................................ 140
Playing back a Bluetooth device .................... 91
Playing back a Blu-ray Disc player ................. 80
Playing back a DVD player ............................. 80
Playing back an iPod ...................................... 81
Playing back Flickr ....................................... 116
Playing back from PC ................................... 109
Playing back Internet Radio ......................... 105
Playing back NAS ........................................ 109
Playing back Pandora® ............................... 117
Playing back SiriusXM ................................. 124
Playing back USB memory device ................. 86
Playing back ZONE2/ZONE3 ....................... 168
Preset codes ................................................ 339
Protection circuit .......................................... 327
PURE DIRECT ............................................. 144
v R
Random playback .................................. 85, 132
Rear panel ...................................................... 24
Remote control unit ........................................ 27
Remove from Favorites ................................ 134
Repeat playback .................................... 85, 132
Resetting factory settings ............................. 299
v S
Save to Favorites ......................................... 133
Selecting the input source .............................. 79
Setup Assistant ............................................ 177
Sleep timer ................................................... 157
Slideshow .................................................... 135
Slideshow Interval ........................................ 136
Smart select function .................................... 159
Sound mode ................................. 143, 309, 311
Speaker connection ....................................... 32
Speaker Settings .................................. 176, 210
Stereo sound mode ...................................... 150
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
337
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

v T
Text Search .................................................. 134
Tips .............................................................. 279
Tone Control ................................................ 138
Troubleshooting ........................................... 281
Turning off the sound temporarily (Muting) ..... 80
Turning the power on ..................................... 79
v V
Video Conversion ................................. 200, 303
Video Select ................................................. 139
Video settings ....................................... 175, 193
v W
Web control .................................................. 162
Wi-Fi settings ............................................... 248
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
338
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

List of preset codes
To return a preset code to the default settings, register the AVR code “0000” to the button whose preset code you want to cancel.
AVR
.
MMarantz 0000
CBL/SAT group
Registrable input source button :
.
A
Access Communications
4081
Adams Cable TV 4081
Alabama Broadband 4081
Alphastar 4027
B
Alta Utilities 4075
Americable International
4075
Amstrad 4076, 4046, 4047, 4050
Anne Arundel Broadband
4081
Apple TV 4068
Arledge Electronics 4074, 4081
Armstrong 4081
Astound Broadband 4075, 4081
ATMC 4081
Atsky 4048
Ballard Rural
Telephone Cooperative
4074
Bee Line Cable 4081
Bell 4074
Bell Satellite TV 4074
Bend Broadband 4081
Blue Ridge
Communications 4075
Boycom Cablevision 4081
Bright House 4075, 4081
Bristol Tennessee
Essential Services 4075
BSkyB 4076, 4021, 4045, 4046
Buckeye Cable System
4081
Cable America 4075
C
Cable Axion Digitel 4081
Cable Cable 4075
Cablecom 4080
Cable &
Communications 4081
Cable One 4081
Cable Suite 4081
Cable TV of Camrose
4081
Cablevision du Nord 4081
Cablevision of
Marion County 4081
Cable Vision Services
4075
Cablevision 4075, 4081
Canal+ 4082
CanalSat 4082
CAS Cable 4081
CCAP 4075
Chaparral 4039
Chambers Cable 4081
Charter 4075, 4081
Chester Telephone 4081
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
339
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

CBL/SAT group
Registrable input source button :
.
Cincinnati Bell 4075, 4081
Citizens Cable TV 4081
Cisco
Cogeco
4075, 4080
Coast Cable
Communications 4081
Coast Communications
4081
4081
D
E
F
G
H
Community Cable
& Broadband 4081
Comcast 4075, 4081
Comporium 4075
Coop CSCF 4081
Consolidated
Communications 4081
Coosa Cable 4081
Country Cablevision 4081
Country Cablevision Ltd.
4081
CRRS-TV 4081
Delta Cable 4081
Dish Mexico 4074
Dishpro 4074
Direct Tv 4001, 4016, 4044
Dish Network 4030
Drake 4026
East Arkansas Video 4081
EastLink 4081
DRE 4051
Easton Cable 4075
Echostar
Eurosky 4056, 4047
Express Vu 4017
Cox 4075, 4081
4074, 4007, 4017, 4018, 4019,
4020, 4062, 4063, 4064
Fayetteville
Electric System 4075
Columbus Telephone 4081
FirstMile 4081
Florida Cable 4081
4075
4051
4056
4025
4081
Foothills Rural
Telephone Cooperative
Foxtel
Freesat
Fujitsu
GCI
4002, 4008, 4009
GE
4036, 4037
General Instruments
4051
General Satellite
4081
Glenwood
Telecommunications
4075, 4081
Grande
Communications
4044, 4057
Gradiente
4081
Harlan Community TV
4081
Harlan Municipal
Utilities
4001, 4015
Hitachi
4081
4081
4081
4074
4001, 4016
4078, 4079, 4049, 4050, 4051,
4052, 4053
4081
4075
4081
4081
4075
4025
4074, 4017
4078
4081
4075
4069
4081
4081
4081
4081
4000
4081
4075
4081
4081
4081
HomeTel
Hood Canal
Cablevision
Horizon Cable TV
HTS
Hughes Network
Humax
HunTel Systems
ImOn
Communications
Inside Connect Cable
Insight
Inter Mountain Cable
Janeil
JVC
Kabel Deutschland
KBS Cable TV
Knology
LG Smart TV
Liberty Cablevision
Lincoln Cable
Television
Loretel Systems
Madison
Communications
Marantz
Markdale Cable TV
MCV Broadband
Mediacom
Mediapolis
Telephone
Mediastream
I
J
K
L
M
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
340
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

CBL/SAT group
Registrable input source button :
.
Mid-Rivers
Communications
MetroCast
Cablevision
Midcontinent
Communications
4081
4081
4075
4081
Minet
MetroNet
4001
Mitsubishi 3007
Mosaic Telecom 4081
Morristown Utility
Systems 4075
Motorola 4081
MTC Technologies 4081
Muscatine Power
& Water 4081
Netgear Neo TV 4072
Nextgen
Communications 4075, 4081
Nokia 4058, 4059, 4060, 4061
N
Northland
Communications 4081
Northwest Iowa
Telephone 4075
Northwest
Telephone Cooperative
4081
NorthwesTel 4081
Novus 4081
NuLink 4075
NTL 4077
Optima 4048
Optus 4077
Orbitel
Communications 4081
O
Pace 4075, 4077, 4076, 4079, 4080, 4081,
4082
Panasonic 4004, 4010
Panhandle Telephone
4081
Philips 4080, 4031,4035, 4044, 4057
Pine Bluff Cable 4081
Pioneer 4075
Proscan 4002, 4008, 4009, 4011
P
PTCI 4081
Radio Shack 4036, 4037
Rancho Murieta
Association 4081
RCA 4002, 4008, 4009, 4029
R
RCN 4081
Realistic 4040
Reservation
Telephone 4081
Resort Cable 4081
S
Rogers 4075, 4081
Roku XDS 4073
Rural Cable 4036
Rural Telephone
Company 4081
Samsung 4075, 4076, 4077, 4022, 4027, 4042,
4043, 4054, 4055, 4050
Schneider 4041, 4043
Scientific Atlanta 4075
Service Electric 4081
Shaw 4081
Shentel 4081
T
Sjoberg's Cable TV 4081
SKY 4076, 4079, 4044, 4045, 4057
Sky Deutschland 4079
Skyplus 4048
Skysat 4041, 4047, 4056
Source Cable 4081
Sony 4003, 4012, 4014, 4065, 4066, 4067,
4014, 4070
Sun Country Cable 4081
Star Choice 4032
Star Trak 4024
STS 4038
Suddenlink 4075, 4081
SuperDish 4028
TDS Telecom 4074
Teac 4049
Teledistribution
Amos
4081
Telus 4074
Texas Mid-Gulf
Cablevision 4081
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
341
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

CBL/SAT group
Registrable input source button :
.
Tricolor TV 4051
Tri-County Cable TV 4081
Troy Cablevision 4081
TV Cable Company
of Andalusia 4081
Universum 4075
Uniden 4005, 4006, 4013
United Communications
Association
4081
Utilities Board City
of Foley 4081
UPC 4077, 4080
UPC Cablecom 4080
Valparaiso
Communications 4081
U
Videotron 4075
Video Pall 4025
Vision
Communications 4081
Virgin Media 4077
Volcano Vision 4081
VTR 4081
Wadsworth Cable TV
4081
Waitsfield Cable 4081
Wave Broadband 4081
Western Iowa
Telephone 4075
Western Digital
WD TV 4071
Westman
Communications 4081
V
White County Video 4081
WideOpenWest 4081
Willamette
Broadband 4081
Windom
Communications 4075
WOW! 4075, 4081
Xfinity 4075, 4081
Zenith 4033, 4025, 4023
W
X
Z
Thomson 4076, 4080, 4046, 4056
Time Warner 4075, 4081
Toshiba 4001, 4034
Total Cable Service 4081
Triangle
Communication System
4074
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
342
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Audio group
Registrable input source button :
.
Advantage 3063
AH! 3106
Aiwa 3104, 3106, 3001, 3002, 3003
Akai 3004, 3005, 3006
Arcam 3106, 3107
Atoll Electronique 3106
Audio 3007
Audio LABS 3008
Audio Research 3106
Audiolab 3106
Audiomeca 3106
A
Audioton 3106
AVI 3106
Cairn 3106
California 3008
Cambridge 3106
Carver 3106, 3009, 3010, 3011
Casio 3012, 3020
Copland 3109
Curtis 3020, 3012
Cyrus 3106
Denon 3013, 3108
DKK 3097
Dual 3108
Dynaco 3106
Emerson 3014
Fisher 3011, 3015, 3016, 3017, 3018
C
D
E
F
Garrard 3109
GE 3109
Genexxa
3063, 3014, 3021, 3020
Goldmund 3106
Grundig 3106
Harman/Kardon 3106
Harmon 3022, 3023, 3051
G
Hitachi 3063, 3020
Inkel 3024
Integra 3110
JC Penney 3012, 3020, 3025
H
JVC 3026, 3027
Kardon 3022, 3051, 3023
Kenwood
3106, 3028, 3029, 3030, 3031,
3032, 3033
Krell 3106, 3010
I
J
K
L
M
Linn 3106
Loewe 3106
Luxman 3109, 3035, 3036, 3037, 3038
LX I 3012, 3020, 3014
Magnavox 3106, 3010, 3039, 3040
Marantz 3000, 3106, 3010, 3041, 3042, 3043
Mathes 3012, 3020
Matsui 3106
MCS 3012, 3020
Memorex 3063
Meridian 3106
MGA 3023
Micromega 3106
N
O
P
Q
R
Mission 3106, 3010
Mitsubishi 3023, 3044
Musical Fidelity 3109
Myryad 3106
NAD 3097, 3034, 3045
Naim 3106
Nakamichi 3046, 3047, 3048
NEC MCS 3025
Nikko 3007, 3016
NSM 3106
Onkyo 3110, 3049, 3050, 3051, 3052,
3055, 3102, 3103
Optimus 3063 3097, 3011, 3014, 3020,3028,
3053, 3054, 3056, 3057,3058
Orion 3109
Panasonic 3008, 3060, 3061
Philips 3106, 3009, 3010, 3040
Pioneer 3110, 3020, 3021, 3062, 3063, 3064
Primare 3106
Proton 3106
QED 3106
Quad 3106
Quasar 3008
Radiola 3106
RCA
3063, 3011, 3014, 3065, 3066, 3067,
3068, 3069
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
343
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Audio group
Registrable input source button :
.
Realistic 3011 3014, 3020, 3042, 3054, 3057
Restek 3106
Revox 3106
Rotel 3106, 3010
RS Original 3070
SAE 3106, 3010, 3083
Samsung 3071
Sansui 3106, 3014, 3068, 3072, 3073
Sanyo 3011, 3018,3074, 3075,3076
Scott 3014
Sears 3012, 3014, 3020, 3028,3042
S
Sharp 3028, 3042, 3077
Sherwood 3042, 3056, 3070, 3078,3024
Shure 3025
Siemens 3106
Simaudio 3106
Sonic Frontiers 3106
Sony 3039, 3079, 3080,3081,3082, 3097,
3098, 3099, 3100, 3101
Symphonic 3083
Sylvania 3010
TAG McLaren 3106
Tandy 3063
Teac 3109, 3016, 3042, 3057, 3083, 3084,
3085, 3086
Technica
Theta Digital 3040
3007, 3008, 3061, 3087, 3088
Thorens 3106
Thule Audio 3106
T
Toshiba 3045
Universum
3106
Victor 3026
Wadia 3106
Wards 3106,3063,3097
Yamaha 3105,3063,3007,3089,3090,3091,
3092
U
Zenith 3016,3093,3094,3095,3096
V
W
Y
Z
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
344
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

TV group
Registrable input source button :
.
Acer 1141
Aiko 1059
Admiral 1009, 1089, 1002
Aiwa 1117, 1118
Akai 1161, 1164, 1172, 1001
Amtron 1023
Anam 1113
Anam National 1023, 1069, 1092
AOC 1003, 1049, 1024, 1127
Aristona 1172
Audiovox 1023
Baird 1161
A
B
Barco 1172
Basic Line 1172
Bell & Howell 1009, 1025
Benq 1104, 1142
Berthen 1172
Blue Sky 1172
BPL 1161
Broksonic 1097, 1098, 1113, 1003
Bush 1161, 1172
Celebrity 1001
Citizen 1003, 1023, 1059, 1063, 1026, 1013
Colortyme 1003, 1043
Contec/Cony 1045, 1047, 1023, 1113
Craig 1023, 1113, 1020, 1022
Crown 1161, 1023, 1067
C
Curtis Mathes 1003, 1110, 1025, 1062, 1026, 1103,
1013
Daewoo 1003, 1059, 1024, 1084, 1101, 1013,
1035, 1036, 1172
Dansai 1161
Daytron 1003, 1013, 1016
De Graaf 1161
D
Dimensia 1110, 1103
Direct TV 1152
Dumont 1010, 1003, 1153
D-Vision 1172
Elbe 1172
Electroband 1001
Electrohome
1003, 1133, 1001, 1069
Emerson
1003, 1020, 1044, 1038, 1045, 1048,
1055, 1023, 1025, 1061, 1022, 1094,
1096, 1099, 1013, 1113, 1101, 1015,
1021
E
F
Envision 1003
ESA 1164
Finlandia 1161
Finlux 1172
Fisher 1161, 1051, 1025, 1091, 1160
Firstline 1161, 1172
Freesat 1165
Fujitsu 1038, 1155, 1124, 1125
Funai 1038, 1023, 1113
Gateway 1150
GE
1110, 1003, 1085, 1046, 1054, 1133,
1018, 1069, 1022, 1103, 1113, 1136,
1153
G
H
I
J
Goldstar 1045, 1024, 1112, 1080, 1100, 1013,
1003, 1030, 1154
Goodmans 1172
Granada 1161
Grandin 1172
Grundig 1172
Hallmark 1003
Hanseatic 1172
Hisense 1172, 1161, 1116
Hitachi
1041, 1003, 1045, 1047, 1032, 1065,
1068, 1088, 1082, 1037, 1094, 1031,
1159, 1145, 1139, 1012, 1140
Hypson 1172
Infinity 1067
Internal 1172
ITT 1161
ITT Nokia 1161
Janeil 1134
JBL 1067
JC Penney
1003, 1046, 1047, 1054, 1133, 1110,
1019, 1112, 1024, 1063, 1018, 1026,
1083, 1085, 1100, 1103,1013,1154
Jensen 1003
JMB 1172
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
345
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

TV group
Registrable input source button :
.
Jubilee 1172
JVC 1045, 1047, 1050, 1060, 1065, 1028,
1029
Kathrein 1172
Kawasho 1003, 1001
Kenwood 1003
Kloss Novabeam 1056, 1023, 1057, 1134
Kneissel 1172
KTV 1023, 1073, 1099, 1013,1113,1033,
1034
LG 1162, 1171, 1172, 1024,1030
Luxor 1161
K
L
MM.Wards 1002, 1009, 1038
Magnavox 1175, 1003, 1052, 1053, 1056, 1057,
1063, 1081, 1067, 1106
Marantz 1000, 1172, 1003, 1122, 1067, 1031
Matsui 1161, 1172
Mitsubishi 1172, 1003, 1051, 1133, 1122, 1024,
1115
Motorola 1069, 1014
Myryad 1172
NEC 1029, 1003, 1043, 1024, 1069, 1012
Neckermann 1172
NET-TV 1137, 1150
Neufunk 1172
Nokia 1161
Oceanic 1161
Onida 1029
N
O
Orion 1172, 1020, 1096
Osaki 1172
Pacific 1172
Otto Versand 1172
Panasonic 1165, 1067, 1069, 1111, 1017, 1095
Philips
1172, 1175, 1003, 1045, 1052, 1054,
1056, 1057, 1058, 1063, 1069, 1067,
1011
P
Philips Magnavox 1106, 1067
Pioneer 1003, 1018, 1070, 1071, 1037, 1094,
1145, 1147, 1149
Plasmsync 1135
Portland 1003, 1059, 1024, 1013
Price Club 1026
Prism
1018
Proscan 1110, 1085, 1103, 1004, 1005, 1006,
1007, 1008
Q
R
Pro Vision 1172
Proton 1003, 1045
Pye 1172
Quasar 1069, 1073, 1111, 1010, 1153
Radiola 1172
Radio Shack 1025, 1103, 1113, 1024
Radio Shack/Realistic
1003, 1045, 1023, 1110, 1025, 1015,
1100, 1013
RCA
1110, 1003, 1049, 1024, 1069, 1075,
1079, 1085, 1087, 1088, 1093, 1094,
1101, 1103, 1113, 1004, 1005, 1006,
1007, 1008, 1153, 1014
Realistic 1025, 1103
Runco 1010, 1153
SSalora 1161
Sampo 1150
Samsung
1163, 1164, 1172, 1003, 1045, 1024,
1062, 1026, 1078, 1083, 1090, 1100,
1013, 1105, 1040, 1146, 1148, 1120,
1121, 1114, 1157
Sansui 1119
Sanyo 1161, 1166, 1003, 1051, 1025, 1072,
1077, 1091, 1156, 1157, 1158
SBR 1172
Schneider 1172
Sharp
1177, 1029, 1173, 1003, 1045, 1055,
1015, 1064, 1066, 1076, 1089, 1013,
1014, 1123
Siera 1172
Signature 1009
Sonitron 1161
Sonolor 1161
Sony 1174, 1001, 1102, 1108
Soundesign 1003, 1038, 1023, 1063, 1113
Starlite 1023
Supersonic 1161
Supre-Macy 1134
Svasa 1161
Sylvania 1003, 1042, 1052, 1053, 1063, 1056,
1057, 1067, 1089, 1151, 1039, 1089
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
346
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

TV group
Registrable input source button :
.
Symphonic 1044, 1023, 1039
Tandy 1014
Tatung 1069
Technics 1172, 1018
TechniSat 1172
Technosonic 1172
Tecnimagen 1172
Techwood 1003, 1018
Tedelex 1161
Teknika
1003, 1009, 1038, 1045, 1047, 1063,
1023, 1059, 1024, 1026, 1111, 1013,
1113
T
Telecaption 1074
Telestar 1172
Tesla 1172
Tevion 1172
Toshiba
1176, 1167, 1168, 1042, 1025, 1074,
1026, 1098, 1003, 1107, 1019, 1027,
1111, 1135, 1136
Totevision 1013
TRANS-continents 1172
Triad 1172
Triumph 1172
TVTEXT 1172
United 1172
Universal 1046, 1054
Video Concepts 1113
Viewsonic 1130, 1128, 1006, 1131, 1129, 1109,
1143, 1150, 1022, 1138, 1145
U
V
VIZIO 1169, 1170
Wards
1003, 1009, 1044, 1038, 1046, 1052,
1054, 1056, 1110, 1057, 1024, 1015,
1067, 1086, 1103
White Westinghouse
1101, 1001
W
Wharfedale 1172
Wilson 1172
Windy Sam 1172
Yamaha 1003, 1024
Zenith 1171, 1010, 1003, 1009, 1144, 1153,
1032
Y
Z
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
347
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

DVD group
Registrable input source button :
.
3D LAB 2069
Aiwa 2036, 2037
Alba 2069
Aristona 2069
Apex 2017, 2034, 2018, 2019, 2021, 2012
Bluray 2064
Bose 2038, 2039, 2063
Brandt 2004
California Audio Labs
2066
CyberHome 2068
Dantax 2069
A
B
Denon 2047, 2066, 2048
Elta 2068
Finlux 2010
Funai 2049
GE 2020, 2029, 2033, 2009
Go Video 2010
GoldStar 2010
GPX 2010
Grundig 2069
Harman Kardon 2061
Hanseatic 2010
Hitachi 2031, 2012, 2008, 2031
Integra 2062
Insignia 2010
JVC 2069, 2004, 2006, 2010, 2040, 2041,
2042, 2043
C
D
D
F
G
H
J
Kenwood 2066, 2054, 2053
Koss 2058
LG 2010
Loewe 2069, 2010
Lumatron 2010
K
L
Lunatron 2010
Luxman 2008
Magnavox 2069, 2004, 2023, 2025, 2011, 2007
Marantz 2000, 2069, 2025, 2065
Medion 2044, 2010
Micromedia 2069, 2004
Micromega
2069
Mitsubishi 2011, 2015
M
N
O
P
R
mp man 2068
NAD 2010
NEC 2010
Omni 2068
Onkyo 2062, 2004
Oritron 2030, 2009
Panasonic 2066, 2004, 2003, 2015, 2016, 2055
Philips 2069, 2004, 2007, 2011,2058
Pioneer 2002, 2014, 2056
Polk Audio 2069
Pye 2069
Proscan 2020, 2032, 2009
Radionette 2010
RCA 2020, 2005, 2009, 2035, 2057
REC 2066
S
T
U
W
Y
Z
Rotel 2040
Salora 2010
Sampo 2041
Universum 2010
Windy Sam 2008
2066, 2069, 2046, 2060
Yamaha
Zenith 2010
Samsung 2066, 2008, 2022, 2024, 2027, 2012
Sanyo 2050, 2052
Schneider 2069
Sharp 2044, 2045
Sherwood 2051, 2010
Skantic 2069
Silva Schneider 2010
Sony 2067, 2001, 2013, 2059
Sylvania 2044
Targa 2010
TCM 2010
Technics 2066
Teac 2010
Tchibo 2010
Toshiba 2004, 2026, 2028, 2008
Typhoon 2068
3
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
348
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Blu-ray group
Registrable input source button :
.
Denon 5034, 5042, 5035, 5036
Hitachi 5031, 5032, 5033
Integra 5013
JVC 5037, 5041, 5014, 5015, 5017, 5018,
5019, 5020
LG 5041, 5010, 5011
Marantz 5000, 5026, 5027
Microsoft 5044
Mitsubishi 5024, 5025
NEC 5041
Onkyo 5013
Panasonic 5041, 5001, 5002, 5003
Philips 5038, 5040, 5004
Pioneer 5005
RCA 5012
Samsung 5039, 5006, 5005
Sharp 5028, 5029, 5030
Sony 5007, 5008, 5009, 5016
Toshiba 5043, 5012
Xbox 5044
Yamaha 5021, 5022, 5023
D
I
J
L
M
N
P
R
S
T
X
Y
O
H
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
349
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

License
This section describes software license used for this unit.
To maintain the correct content, the original (English) is used.
oBoost
http://www.boost.org/
Boost Software License – Version 1.0 – August 17th, 2003
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person or organization obtaining
a copy of the software and accompanying documentation covered by this license
(the “Software”) to use, reproduce, display, distribute, execute, and transmit the
Software, and to prepare derivative works of the Software, and to permit third-parties
to whom the Software is furnished to do so, all subject to the following:
The copyright notices in the Software and this entire statement, including the above
license grant, this restriction and the following disclaimer, must be included in all
copies of the Software, in whole or in part, and all derivative works of the Software,
unless such copies or derivative works are solely in the form of machine-executable
object code generated by a source language processor.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS”, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES
OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE AND
NON-INFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR
ANYONE DISTRIBUTING THE SOFTWARE BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES OR
OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING
FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR
OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
oExpat
http://www.jclark.com/xml/expat.html
Expat License. Copyright (c) 1998, 1999, 2000 Thai Open Source Software Center
Ltd
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this
software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software
without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge,
publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit
persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following
conditions:
The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies
or substantial portions of the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS”, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES
OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT
HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING
FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR
OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
oFastDelegate
http://www.codeproject.com/KB/cpp/FastDelegate.aspx
THE WORK (AS DEFINED BELOW) IS PROVIDED UNDER THE TERMS OF THIS
CODE PROJECT OPEN LICENSE (“LICENSE”). THE WORK IS PROTECTED BY
COPYRIGHT AND/OR OTHER APPLICABLE LAW. ANY USE OF THE WORK
OTHER THAN AS AUTHORIZED UNDER THIS LICENSE OR COPYRIGHT LAW IS
PROHIBITED.
BY EXERCISING ANY RIGHTS TO THE WORK PROVIDED HEREIN, YOU
ACCEPT AND AGREE TO BE BOUND BY THE TERMS OF THIS LICENSE. THE
AUTHOR GRANTS YOU THE RIGHTS CONTAINED HEREIN IN CONSIDERATION
OF YOUR ACCEPTANCE OF SUCH TERMS AND CONDITIONS. IF YOU DO NOT
AGREE TO ACCEPT AND BE BOUND BY THE TERMS OF THIS LICENSE, YOU
CANNOT MAKE ANY USE OF THE WORK.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
350
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Definitions. “Articles” means, collectively, all articles written by Author which
describes how the Source Code and Executable Files for the Work may be used by a
user.
“Author” means the individual or entity that offers the Work under the terms of this
License.
“Derivative Work” means a work based upon the Work or upon the Work and other
pre-existing works.
“Executable Files” refer to the executables, binary files, configuration and any
required data files included in the Work.
“Publisher” means the provider of the website, magazine, CD-ROM, DVD or other
medium from or by which the Work is obtained by You.
“Source Code” refers to the collection of source code and configuration files used to
create the Executable Files.
“Standard Version” refers to such a Work if it has not been modified, or has been
modified in accordance with the consent of the Author, such consent being in the full
discretion of the Author.
“Work” refers to the collection of files distributed by the Publisher, including the
Source Code, Executable Files, binaries, data files, documentation, whitepapers and
the Articles.
“You” is you, an individual or entity wishing to use the Work and exercise your rights
under this License.
Fair Use/Fair Use Rights. Nothing in this License is intended to reduce, limit, or
restrict any rights arising from fair use, fair dealing, first sale or other limitations on the
exclusive rights of the copyright owner under copyright law or other applicable laws.
License Grant. Subject to the terms and conditions of this License, the Author hereby
grants You a worldwide, royalty-free, non-exclusive, perpetual (for the duration of the
applicable copyright) license to exercise the rights in the Work as stated below: You
may use the standard version of the Source Code or Executable Files in Your own
applications.
You may apply bug fixes, portability fixes and other modifications obtained from the
Public Domain or from the Author. A Work modified in such a way shall still be
considered the standard version and will be subject to this License.
You may otherwise modify Your copy of this Work (excluding the Articles) in any way
to create a Derivative Work, provided that You insert a prominent notice in each
changed file stating how, when and where You changed that file.
You may distribute the standard version of the Executable Files and Source Code or
Derivative Work in aggregate with other (possibly commercial) programs as part of a
larger (possibly commercial) software distribution.
The Articles discussing the Work published in any form by the author may not be
distributed or republished without the Author’s consent. The author retains copyright
to any such Articles. You may use the Executable Files and Source Code pursuant to
this License but you may not repost or republish or otherwise distribute or make
available the Articles, without the prior written consent of the Author.
Any subroutines or modules supplied by You and linked into the Source Code or
Executable Files this Work shall not be considered part of this Work and will not be
subject to the terms of this License.
Patent License. Subject to the terms and conditions of this License, each Author
hereby grants to You a perpetual, worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge, royalty-free,
irrevocable (except as stated in this section) patent license to make, have made, use,
import, and otherwise transfer the Work.
Restrictions. The license granted in Section 3 above is expressly made subject to
and limited by the following restrictions: You agree not to remove any of the original
copyright, patent, trademark, and attribution notices and associated disclaimers that
may appear in the Source Code or Executable Files.
You agree not to advertise or in any way imply that this Work is a product of Your
own.
The name of the Author may not be used to endorse or promote products derived
from the Work without the prior written consent of the Author.
You agree not to sell, lease, or rent any part of the Work. This does not restrict you
from including the Work or any part of the Work inside a larger software distribution
that itself is being sold. The Work by itself, though, cannot be sold, leased or rented.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
351
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

You may distribute the Executable Files and Source Code only under the terms of
this License, and You must include a copy of, or the Uniform Resource Identifier for,
this License with every copy of the Executable Files or Source Code You distribute
and ensure that anyone receiving such Executable Files and Source Code agrees
that the terms of this License apply to such Executable Files and/or Source Code.
You may not offer or impose any terms on the Work that alter or restrict the terms of
this License or the recipients’ exercise of the rights granted hereunder. You may not
sublicense the Work. You must keep intact all notices that refer to this License and to
the disclaimer of warranties. You may not distribute the Executable Files or Source
Code with any technological measures that control access or use of the Work in a
manner inconsistent with the terms of this License.
You agree not to use the Work for illegal, immoral or improper purposes, or on pages
containing illegal, immoral or improper material. The Work is subject to applicable
export laws. You agree to comply with all such laws and regulations that may apply to
the Work after Your receipt of the Work.
Representations, Warranties and Disclaimer. THIS WORK IS PROVIDED “AS IS”,
“WHERE IS” AND “AS AVAILABLE”, WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OR GUARANTEES. YOU, THE USER, ASSUME
ALL RISK IN ITS USE, INCLUDING COPYRIGHT INFRINGEMENT, PATENT
INFRINGEMENT, SUITABILITY, ETC. AUTHOR EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ALL
EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS,
INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF
MERCHANTABILITY, MERCHANTABLE QUALITY OR FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OR ANY WARRANTY OF TITLE OR NON-
INFRINGEMENT, OR THAT THE WORK (OR ANY PORTION THEREOF) IS
CORRECT, USEFUL, BUG-FREE OR FREE OF VIRUSES. YOU MUST PASS THIS
DISCLAIMER ON WHENEVER YOU DISTRIBUTE THE WORK OR DERIVATIVE
WORKS.
Indemnity. You agree to defend, indemnify and hold harmless the Author and the
Publisher from and against any claims, suits, losses, damages, liabilities, costs, and
expenses (including reasonable legal or attorneys’ fees) resulting from or relating to
any use of the Work by You.
Limitation on Liability. EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE
LAW, IN NO EVENT WILL THE AUTHOR OR THE PUBLISHER BE LIABLE TO YOU
ON ANY LEGAL THEORY FOR ANY SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL,
PUNITIVE OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THIS LICENSE OR THE
USE OF THE WORK OR OTHERWISE, EVEN IF THE AUTHOR OR THE
PUBLISHER HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
Termination.
This License and the rights granted hereunder will terminate automatically upon any
breach by You of any term of this License. Individuals or entities who have received
Derivative Works from You under this License, however, will not have their licenses
terminated provided such individuals or entities remain in full compliance with those
licenses. Sections 1, 2, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10 and 11 will survive any termination of this
License.
If You bring a copyright, trademark, patent or any other infringement claim against
any contributor over infringements You claim are made by the Work, your License
from such contributor to the Work ends automatically.
Subject to the above terms and conditions, this License is perpetual (for the duration
of the applicable copyright in the Work). Notwithstanding the above, the Author
reserves the right to release the Work under different license terms or to stop
distributing the Work at any time; provided, however that any such election will not
serve to withdraw this License (or any other license that has been, or is required to
be, granted under the terms of this License), and this License will continue in full
force and effect unless terminated as stated above.
Publisher. The parties hereby confirm that the Publisher shall not, under any
circumstances, be responsible for and shall not have any liability in respect of the
subject matter of this License. The Publisher makes no warranty whatsoever in
connection with the Work and shall not be liable to You or any party on any legal
theory for any damages whatsoever, including without limitation any general, special,
incidental or consequential damages arising in connection to this license. The
Publisher reserves the right to cease making the Work available to You at any time
without notice
Miscellaneous
This License shall be governed by the laws of the location of the head office of the
Author or if the Author is an individual, the laws of location of the principal place of
residence of the Author.
If any provision of this License is invalid or unenforceable under applicable law, it
shall not affect the validity or enforceability of the remainder of the terms of this
License, and without further action by the parties to this License, such provision shall
be reformed to the minimum extent necessary to make such provision valid and
enforceable.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
352
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

No term or provision of this License shall be deemed waived and no breach
consented to unless such waiver or consent shall be in writing and signed by the
party to be charged with such waiver or consent.
This License constitutes the entire agreement between the parties with respect to the
Work licensed herein. There are no understandings, agreements or representations
with respect to the Work not specified herein. The Author shall not be bound by any
additional provisions that may appear in any communication from You. This License
may not be modified without the mutual written agreement of the Author and You
olibogg
http://www.xiph.org/ogg/
Copyright (c) 2002, Xiph.org Foundation
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are
permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
0Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer.
0Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list
of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other
materials provided with the distribution.
0Neither the name of the Xiph.org Foundation nor the names of its contributors may
be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without
specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND
CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE FOUNDATION OR CONTRIBUTORS BE
LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA,
OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON
ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT
OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
SUCH DAMAGE.
olibvorbis
http://www.xiph.org/vorbis/
Copyright (c) 2002-2004 Xiph.org Foundation
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are
permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
0Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer.
0Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list
of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other
materials provided with the distribution.
0Neither the name of the Xiph.org Foundation nor the names of its contributors may
be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without
specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND
CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE FOUNDATION OR CONTRIBUTORS BE
LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA,
OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON
ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT
OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
SUCH DAMAGE.
oTremolo
http://wss.co.uk/pinknoise/tremolo
Copyright (C) 2002 – 2009 Xiph.org Foundation Changes Copyright (C) 2009 – 2010
Robin Watts for Pinknoise Productions Ltd
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are
permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
353
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

0Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer.
0Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list
of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other
materials provided with the distribution.
0Neither the name of the Xiph.org Foundation nor the names of its contributors may
be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without
specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND
CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE FOUNDATION OR CONTRIBUTORS BE
LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA,
OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON
ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT
OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
SUCH DAMAGE.
oTremor
http://wiki.xiph.org/index.php/Tremor
Copyright (c) 2002, Xiph.org Foundation
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are
permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
0Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer.
0Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list
of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other
materials provided with the distribution.
0Neither the name of the Xiph.org Foundation nor the names of its contributors may
be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without
specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND
CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE FOUNDATION OR CONTRIBUTORS BE
LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA,
OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON
ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT
OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
SUCH DAMAGE.
oMersenne Twister
http://www.math.sci.hiroshima-u.ac.jp/~m-mat/MT/MT2002/CODES/mt19937ar.c
Copyright (C) 1997 – 2002, Makoto Matsumoto and Takuji Nishimura,
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are
permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer.
Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials
provided with the distribution.
The names of its contributors may not be used to endorse or promote products
derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
354
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND
CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
ozlib
http://www.zlib.net/
zlib.h -- interface of the “zlib” general purpose compression library version 1.2.3, July
18th, 2005
Copyright (C) 1995 – 2004 Jean-loup Gailly and Mark Adler
This software is provided “as-is”, without any express or implied warranty. In no event
will the authors be held liable for any damages arising from the use of this software.
Permission is granted to anyone to use this software for any purpose, including
commercial applications, and to alter it and redistribute it freely, subject to the
following restrictions:
The origin of this software must not be misrepresented; you must not claim that you
wrote the original software. If you use this software in a product, an acknowledgment
in the product documentation would be appreciated but is not required.
Altered source versions must be plainly marked as such, and must not be
misrepresented as being the original software.
This notice may not be removed or altered from any source distribution.
Jean-loup Gailly jloup@gzip.org, Mark Adler madler@alumni.caltech.edu
ocURL
http://curl.haxx.se
COPYRIGHT AND PERMISSION NOTICE
Copyright (c) 1996 – 2011, Daniel Stenberg, <daniel@haxx.se>.
All rights reserved.
Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software for any purpose with or
without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above copyright notice and this
permission notice appear in all copies.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS”, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES
OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES
OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR
OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE
SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
Except as contained in this notice, the name of a copyright holder shall not be used in
advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use or other dealings in this Software
without prior written authorization of the copyright holder.
oc-ares
http://c-ares.haxx.se
Copyright 1998 by the Massachusetts Institute of Technology.
Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its documentation
for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above copyright
notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission
notice appear in supporting documentation, and that the name of M.I.T. not be used
in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the software without specific,
written prior permission. M.I.T. makes no representations about the suitability of this
software for any purpose. It is provided “as is” without express or implied warranty.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
355
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

oLicense information for the software used in
the unit
About GPL (GNU-General Public License), LGPL (GNU Lesser
General Public License) License
This product uses GPL/LGPL software and software made by other
companies.
After you purchase this product, you may procure, modify or distribute
the source code of the GPL/LGPL software that is used in the product.
Marantz provides the source code based on the GPL and LPGL
licenses at the actual cost upon your request to our customer service
center.
However, note that we make no guarantees concerning the source
code.
Please also understand that we do not offer support for the contents of
the source code.
Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix
356
Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

.
D&M Holdings Inc.
3520 10354 00AM
357